sin/samba-mirror
1
0
Fork 0
mirror of https://github.com/samba-team/samba.git synced 2025-02-09 09:57:48 +03:00
Code

Regenerate

Browse Source 
(This used to be commit 25db62e3101dbcae8e9daee3cb16430297afa223)
This commit is contained in:
Jelmer Vernooij 2003-03-18 16:48:14 +00:00
parent 404d5ba54d
commit 2096762737
103 changed files with 8781 additions and 15235 deletions
Show Stats Download Patch File Download Diff File Expand all files Collapse all files

BIN
docs/Samba-Developers-Guide.pdf
View File

Binary file not shown.

BIN
docs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.pdf
View File

Binary file not shown.

65
docs/faq/samba-faq.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Samba FAQ</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="General Information"
HREF="faq-general.html"></HEAD
@ -27,8 +27,8 @@ CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
CLASS="TITLE"
><A
NAME="SAMBA-FAQ"
></A
>Samba FAQ</H1
>Samba FAQ</A
></H1
><H3
CLASS="AUTHOR"
><A
@ -166,6 +166,11 @@ HREF="faq-config.html"
HREF="faq-config.html#AEN169"
>I have set 'force user' and samba still makes 'root' the owner of all the files I touch!</A
></DT
><DT
>3.2. <A
HREF="faq-config.html#AEN172"
>I have just installed samba and I'm trying to log in from Windows, but samba refuses all logins!</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
@ -177,17 +182,17 @@ HREF="faq-clientapp.html"
><DL
><DT
>4.1. <A
HREF="faq-clientapp.html#AEN174"
HREF="faq-clientapp.html#AEN178"
>MS Office Setup reports "Cannot change properties of '\\MSOFFICE\\SETUP.INI'"</A
></DT
><DT
>4.2. <A
HREF="faq-clientapp.html#AEN179"
HREF="faq-clientapp.html#AEN183"
>How to use a Samba share as an administrative share for MS Office, etc.</A
></DT
><DT
>4.3. <A
HREF="faq-clientapp.html#AEN194"
HREF="faq-clientapp.html#AEN198"
>Microsoft Access database opening errors</A
></DT
></DL
@ -201,37 +206,37 @@ HREF="faq-errors.html"
><DL
><DT
>5.1. <A
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN205"
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN209"
>Not listening for calling name</A
></DT
><DT
>5.2. <A
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN212"
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN216"
>System Error 1240</A
></DT
><DT
>5.3. <A
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN219"
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN223"
>smbclient ignores -N !</A
></DT
><DT
>5.4. <A
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN228"
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN232"
>The data on the CD-Drive I've shared seems to be corrupted!</A
></DT
><DT
>5.5. <A
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN232"
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN236"
>Why can users access home directories of other users?</A
></DT
><DT
>5.6. <A
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN245"
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN249"
>Until a few minutes after samba has started, clients get the error "Domain Controller Unavailable"</A
></DT
><DT
>5.7. <A
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN248"
HREF="faq-errors.html#AEN252"
>I'm getting "open_oplock_ipc: Failed to get local UDP socket for address 100007f. Error was Cannot assign requested" in the logs</A
></DT
></DL
@ -245,60 +250,74 @@ HREF="faq-features.html"
><DL
><DT
>6.1. <A
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN253"
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN257"
>How can I prevent my samba server from being used to distribute the Nimda worm?</A
></DT
><DT
>6.2. <A
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN267"
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN271"
>How can I use samba as a fax server?</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>6.2.1. <A
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN278"
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN282"
>Tools for printing faxes</A
></DT
><DT
>6.2.2. <A
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN287"
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN291"
>Making the fax-server</A
></DT
><DT
>6.2.3. <A
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN303"
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN307"
>Installing the client drivers</A
></DT
><DT
>6.2.4. <A
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN317"
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN321"
>Example smb.conf</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>6.3. <A
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN321"
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN325"
>Samba doesn't work well together with DHCP!</A
></DT
><DT
>6.4. <A
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN334"
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN338"
>How can I assign NetBIOS names to clients with DHCP?</A
></DT
><DT
>6.5. <A
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN341"
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN345"
>How do I convert between unix and dos text formats?</A
></DT
><DT
>6.6. <A
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN346"
HREF="faq-features.html#AEN350"
>Does samba have wins replication support?</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>7. <A
HREF="faq-printing.html"
>Printing problems</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>7.1. <A
HREF="faq-printing.html#AEN359"
>setdriver or cupsaddsmb failes</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DIV
></DIV

953
docs/htmldocs/Samba-Developers-Guide.html
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

5335
docs/htmldocs/Samba-HOWTO-Collection.html
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

56
docs/htmldocs/ads.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Samba as a ADS domain member</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -112,9 +112,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1339"
></A
>7.1. Installing the required packages for Debian</H1
NAME="AEN1242"
>7.1. Installing the required packages for Debian</A
></H1
><P
>On Debian you need to install the following packages:</P
><P
@ -142,9 +142,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1346"
></A
>7.2. Installing the required packages for RedHat</H1
NAME="AEN1249"
>7.2. Installing the required packages for RedHat</A
></H1
><P
>On RedHat this means you should have at least: </P
><P
@ -181,9 +181,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1356"
></A
>7.3. Compile Samba</H1
NAME="AEN1259"
>7.3. Compile Samba</A
></H1
><P
>If your kerberos libraries are in a non-standard location then
remember to add the configure option --with-krb5=DIR.</P
@ -237,9 +237,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1371"
></A
>7.4. Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</H1
NAME="AEN1274"
>7.4. Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</A
></H1
><P
>The minimal configuration for krb5.conf is:</P
><P
@ -276,9 +276,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1381"
></A
>7.5. Create the computer account</H1
NAME="AEN1284"
>7.5. Create the computer account</A
></H1
><P
>As a user that has write permission on the Samba private directory
(usually root) run:
@ -291,9 +291,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1385"
></A
>7.5.1. Possible errors</H2
NAME="AEN1288"
>7.5.1. Possible errors</A
></H2
><P
><P
></P
@ -316,9 +316,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1393"
></A
>7.6. Test your server setup</H1
NAME="AEN1296"
>7.6. Test your server setup</A
></H1
><P
>On a Windows 2000 client try <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -336,9 +336,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1398"
></A
>7.7. Testing with smbclient</H1
NAME="AEN1301"
>7.7. Testing with smbclient</A
></H1
><P
>On your Samba server try to login to a Win2000 server or your Samba
server using smbclient and kerberos. Use smbclient as usual, but
@ -349,9 +349,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1401"
></A
>7.8. Notes</H1
NAME="AEN1304"
>7.8. Notes</A
></H1
><P
>You must change administrator password at least once after DC install,
to create the right encoding types</P

210
docs/htmldocs/appendixes.html
View File

@ -5,13 +5,13 @@
>Appendixes</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Creating Group Profiles"
HREF="groupprofiles.html"><LINK
TITLE="Securing Samba"
HREF="securing-samba.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Portability"
HREF="portability.html"></HEAD
@ -42,7 +42,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="groupprofiles.html"
HREF="securing-samba.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
@ -91,24 +91,38 @@ HREF="portability.html"
><DL
><DT
>21.1. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3251"
HREF="portability.html#AEN3156"
>HPUX</A
></DT
><DT
>21.2. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3257"
HREF="portability.html#AEN3162"
>SCO Unix</A
></DT
><DT
>21.3. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3261"
HREF="portability.html#AEN3166"
>DNIX</A
></DT
><DT
>21.4. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3290"
HREF="portability.html#AEN3195"
>RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</A
></DT
><DT
>21.5. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3201"
>AIX</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>21.5.1. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3203"
>Sequential Read Ahead</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DD
><DT
@ -120,37 +134,37 @@ HREF="other-clients.html"
><DL
><DT
>22.1. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3311"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3221"
>Macintosh clients?</A
></DT
><DT
>22.2. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3320"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3230"
>OS2 Client</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>22.2.1. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3322"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3232"
>How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or
OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</A
></DT
><DT
>22.2.2. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3337"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3247"
>How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect),
OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</A
></DT
><DT
>22.2.3. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3346"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3256"
>Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version)
is used as a client?</A
></DT
><DT
>22.2.4. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3350"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3260"
>How do I get printer driver download working
for OS/2 clients?</A
></DT
@ -158,168 +172,230 @@ HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3350"
></DD
><DT
>22.3. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3360"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3270"
>Windows for Workgroups</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>22.3.1. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3362"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3272"
>Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</A
></DT
><DT
>22.3.2. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3367"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3277"
>Delete .pwl files after password change</A
></DT
><DT
>22.3.3. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3372"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3282"
>Configure WfW password handling</A
></DT
><DT
>22.3.4. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3376"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3286"
>Case handling of passwords</A
></DT
><DT
>22.3.5. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3291"
>Use TCP/IP as default protocol</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>22.4. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3381"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3294"
>Windows '95/'98</A
></DT
><DT
>22.5. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3397"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3310"
>Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>23. <A
HREF="compiling.html"
>How to compile SAMBA</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>23.1. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3337"
>Access Samba source code via CVS</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>23.1.1. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3339"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>23.1.2. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3344"
>CVS Access to samba.org</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>23.2. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3380"
>Accessing the samba sources via rsync and ftp</A
></DT
><DT
>23.3. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3386"
>Building the Binaries</A
></DT
><DT
>23.4. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3414"
>Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>23.4.1. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3424"
>Starting from inetd.conf</A
></DT
><DT
>23.4.2. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3453"
>Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DD
><DT
>24. <A
HREF="bugreport.html"
>Reporting Bugs</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>23.1. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3421"
>24.1. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3476"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>23.2. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3431"
>24.2. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3486"
>General info</A
></DT
><DT
>23.3. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3437"
>24.3. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3492"
>Debug levels</A
></DT
><DT
>23.4. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3454"
>24.4. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3509"
>Internal errors</A
></DT
><DT
>23.5. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3464"
>24.5. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3519"
>Attaching to a running process</A
></DT
><DT
>23.6. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3467"
>24.6. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3522"
>Patches</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>24. <A
>25. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html"
>Diagnosing your samba server</A
>The samba checklist</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>24.1. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3490"
>25.1. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3545"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>24.2. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3495"
>25.2. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3550"
>Assumptions</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3505"
>25.3. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3560"
>Tests</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>24.3.1. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3507"
>25.3.1. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3562"
>Test 1</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.2. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3513"
>25.3.2. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3568"
>Test 2</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.3. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3519"
>25.3.3. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3574"
>Test 3</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.4. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3534"
>25.3.4. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3589"
>Test 4</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.5. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3539"
>25.3.5. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3594"
>Test 5</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.6. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3545"
>25.3.6. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3600"
>Test 6</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.7. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3553"
>25.3.7. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3608"
>Test 7</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.8. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3579"
>25.3.8. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3634"
>Test 8</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.9. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3596"
>25.3.9. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3651"
>Test 9</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.10. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3604"
>25.3.10. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3659"
>Test 10</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.11. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3610"
>25.3.11. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3665"
>Test 11</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>24.4. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3615"
>25.4. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3670"
>Still having troubles?</A
></DT
></DL
@ -344,7 +420,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="groupprofiles.html"
HREF="securing-samba.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
@ -372,7 +448,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Creating Group Profiles</TD
>Securing Samba</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"

98
docs/htmldocs/browsing-quick.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -81,21 +81,24 @@ be taken as the fast track guide to implementing browsing across subnets
and / or across workgroups (or domains). WINS is the best tool for resolution
of NetBIOS names to IP addesses. WINS is NOT involved in browse list handling
except by way of name to address mapping.</P
><P
>Note: MS Windows 2000 and later can be configured to operate with NO NetBIOS
over TCP/IP. Samba-3 and later also supports this mode of operation.</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN230"
></A
>2.1. Discussion</H1
NAME="AEN130"
>2.1. Discussion</A
></H1
><P
>Firstly, all MS Windows networking is based on SMB (Server Message
Block) based messaging. SMB messaging is implemented using NetBIOS. Samba
implements NetBIOS by encapsulating it over TCP/IP. MS Windows products can
do likewise. NetBIOS based networking uses broadcast messaging to affect
browse list management. When running NetBIOS over TCP/IP this uses UDP
based messaging. UDP messages can be broadcast or unicast.</P
Block) based messaging. SMB messaging may be implemented using NetBIOS or
without NetBIOS. Samba implements NetBIOS by encapsulating it over TCP/IP.
MS Windows products can do likewise. NetBIOS based networking uses broadcast
messaging to affect browse list management. When running NetBIOS over
TCP/IP this uses UDP based messaging. UDP messages can be broadcast or unicast.</P
><P
>Normally, only unicast UDP messaging can be forwarded by routers. The
"remote announce" parameter to smb.conf helps to project browse announcements
@ -109,18 +112,23 @@ segment is configured with it's own Samba WINS server, then the only way to
get cross segment browsing to work is by using the "remote announce" and
the "remote browse sync" parameters to your smb.conf file.</P
><P
>If only one WINS server is used then the use of the "remote announce" and the
"remote browse sync" parameters should NOT be necessary.</P
>If only one WINS server is used for an entire multi-segment network then
the use of the "remote announce" and the "remote browse sync" parameters
should NOT be necessary.</P
><P
>Samba WINS does not support MS-WINS replication. This means that when setting up
Samba as a WINS server there must only be one nmbd configured as a WINS server
on the network. Some sites have used multiple Samba WINS servers for redundancy
(one server per subnet) and then used "remote browse sync" and "remote announce"
to affect browse list collation across all segments. Note that this means
clients will only resolve local names, and must be configured to use DNS to
resolve names on other subnets in order to resolve the IP addresses of the
servers they can see on other subnets. This setup is not recommended, but is
mentioned as a practical consideration (ie: an 'if all else fails' scenario).</P
>As of Samba-3 WINS replication is being worked on. The bulk of the code has
been committed, but it still needs maturation.</P
><P
>Right now samba WINS does not support MS-WINS replication. This means that
when setting up Samba as a WINS server there must only be one nmbd configured
as a WINS server on the network. Some sites have used multiple Samba WINS
servers for redundancy (one server per subnet) and then used "remote browse
sync" and "remote announce" to affect browse list collation across all
segments. Note that this means clients will only resolve local names,
and must be configured to use DNS to resolve names on other subnets in
order to resolve the IP addresses of the servers they can see on other
subnets. This setup is not recommended, but is mentioned as a practical
consideration (ie: an 'if all else fails' scenario).</P
><P
>Lastly, take note that browse lists are a collection of unreliable broadcast
messages that are repeated at intervals of not more than 15 minutes. This means
@ -132,9 +140,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN238"
></A
>2.2. Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</H1
NAME="AEN139"
>2.2. Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</A
></H1
><P
>The "remote announce" parameter of smb.conf can be used to forcibly ensure
that all the NetBIOS names on a network get announced to a remote network.
@ -190,9 +198,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN252"
></A
>2.3. Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</H1
NAME="AEN153"
>2.3. Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</A
></H1
><P
>The "remote browse sync" parameter of smb.conf is used to announce to
another LMB that it must synchronise it's NetBIOS name list with our
@ -213,9 +221,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN257"
></A
>2.4. Use of WINS</H1
NAME="AEN158"
>2.4. Use of WINS</A
></H1
><P
>Use of WINS (either Samba WINS _or_ MS Windows NT Server WINS) is highly
recommended. Every NetBIOS machine registers it's name together with a
@ -267,22 +275,23 @@ CLASS="emphasis"
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
>DO NOT EVER</I
></SPAN
> use both "wins support = yes" together with "wins server = a.b.c.d"
particularly not using it's own IP address.</P
> use both "wins support = yes" together
with "wins server = a.b.c.d" particularly not using it's own IP address.
Specifying both will cause nmbd to refuse to start!</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN268"
></A
>2.5. Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</H1
NAME="AEN169"
>2.5. Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</A
></H1
><P
>A very common cause of browsing problems results from installing more than
one protocol on an MS Windows machine.</P
><P
>Every NetBIOS machine take part in a process of electing the LMB (and DMB)
>Every NetBIOS machine takes part in a process of electing the LMB (and DMB)
every 15 minutes. A set of election criteria is used to determine the order
of precidence for winning this election process. A machine running Samba or
Windows NT will be biased so that the most suitable machine will predictably
@ -298,6 +307,19 @@ interface over the IPX protocol. Samba will then lose the LMB role as Windows
as an LMB and thus browse list operation on all TCP/IP only machines will
fail.</P
><P
><SPAN
CLASS="emphasis"
><I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
>Windows 95, 98, 98se, Me are referred to generically as Windows 9x.
The Windows NT4, 2000, XP and 2003 use common protocols. These are roughly
referred to as the WinNT family, but it should be recognised that 2000 and
XP/2003 introduce new protocol extensions that cause them to behave
differently from MS Windows NT4. Generally, where a server does NOT support
the newer or extended protocol, these will fall back to the NT4 protocols.</I
></SPAN
></P
><P
>The safest rule of all to follow it this - USE ONLY ONE PROTOCOL!</P
></DIV
><DIV
@ -305,9 +327,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN274"
></A
>2.6. Name Resolution Order</H1
NAME="AEN177"
>2.6. Name Resolution Order</A
></H1
><P
>Resolution of NetBIOS names to IP addresses can take place using a number
of methods. The only ones that can provide NetBIOS name_type information

54
docs/htmldocs/bugreport.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Reporting Bugs</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -13,10 +13,10 @@ REL="UP"
TITLE="Appendixes"
HREF="appendixes.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Samba and other CIFS clients"
HREF="other-clients.html"><LINK
TITLE="How to compile SAMBA"
HREF="compiling.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Diagnosing your samba server"
TITLE="The samba checklist"
HREF="diagnosis.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="other-clients.html"
HREF="compiling.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
@ -74,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
><A
NAME="BUGREPORT"
></A
>Chapter 23. Reporting Bugs</H1
>Chapter 24. Reporting Bugs</H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3421"
></A
>23.1. Introduction</H1
NAME="AEN3476"
>24.1. Introduction</A
></H1
><P
>The email address for bug reports for stable releases is <A
HREF="samba@samba.org"
@ -125,9 +125,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3431"
></A
>23.2. General info</H1
NAME="AEN3486"
>24.2. General info</A
></H1
><P
>Before submitting a bug report check your config for silly
errors. Look in your log files for obvious messages that tell you that
@ -150,9 +150,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3437"
></A
>23.3. Debug levels</H1
NAME="AEN3492"
>24.3. Debug levels</A
></H1
><P
>If the bug has anything to do with Samba behaving incorrectly as a
server (like refusing to open a file) then the log files will probably
@ -220,9 +220,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3454"
></A
>23.4. Internal errors</H1
NAME="AEN3509"
>24.4. Internal errors</A
></H1
><P
>If you get a "INTERNAL ERROR" message in your log files it means that
Samba got an unexpected signal while running. It is probably a
@ -264,9 +264,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3464"
></A
>23.5. Attaching to a running process</H1
NAME="AEN3519"
>24.5. Attaching to a running process</A
></H1
><P
>Unfortunately some unixes (in particular some recent linux kernels)
refuse to dump a core file if the task has changed uid (which smbd
@ -281,9 +281,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3467"
></A
>23.6. Patches</H1
NAME="AEN3522"
>24.6. Patches</A
></H1
><P
>The best sort of bug report is one that includes a fix! If you send us
patches please use <B
@ -314,7 +314,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="other-clients.html"
HREF="compiling.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Samba and other CIFS clients</TD
>How to compile SAMBA</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
@ -356,7 +356,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Diagnosing your samba server</TD
>The samba checklist</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV

631
docs/htmldocs/compiling.html Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,631 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>How to compile SAMBA</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Appendixes"
HREF="appendixes.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Samba and other CIFS clients"
HREF="other-clients.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Reporting Bugs"
HREF="bugreport.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="other-clients.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="bugreport.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="CHAPTER"
><H1
><A
NAME="COMPILING"
></A
>Chapter 23. How to compile SAMBA</H1
><P
>You can obtain the samba source from the <A
HREF="http://samba.org/"
TARGET="_top"
>samba website</A
>. To obtain a development version,
you can download samba from CVS or using rsync. </P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3337"
>23.1. Access Samba source code via CVS</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3339"
>23.1.1. Introduction</A
></H2
><P
>Samba is developed in an open environment. Developers use CVS
(Concurrent Versioning System) to "checkin" (also known as
"commit") new source code. Samba's various CVS branches can
be accessed via anonymous CVS using the instructions
detailed in this chapter.</P
><P
>This chapter is a modified version of the instructions found at
<A
HREF="http://samba.org/samba/cvs.html"
TARGET="_top"
>http://samba.org/samba/cvs.html</A
></P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3344"
>23.1.2. CVS Access to samba.org</A
></H2
><P
>The machine samba.org runs a publicly accessible CVS
repository for access to the source code of several packages,
including samba, rsync and jitterbug. There are two main ways of
accessing the CVS server on this host.</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN3347"
>23.1.2.1. Access via CVSweb</A
></H3
><P
>You can access the source code via your
favourite WWW browser. This allows you to access the contents of
individual files in the repository and also to look at the revision
history and commit logs of individual files. You can also ask for a diff
listing between any two versions on the repository.</P
><P
>Use the URL : <A
HREF="http://samba.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb"
TARGET="_top"
>http://samba.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb</A
></P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN3352"
>23.1.2.2. Access via cvs</A
></H3
><P
>You can also access the source code via a
normal cvs client. This gives you much more control over you can
do with the repository and allows you to checkout whole source trees
and keep them up to date via normal cvs commands. This is the
preferred method of access if you are a developer and not
just a casual browser.</P
><P
>To download the latest cvs source code, point your
browser at the URL : <A
HREF="http://www.cyclic.com/"
TARGET="_top"
>http://www.cyclic.com/</A
>.
and click on the 'How to get cvs' link. CVS is free software under
the GNU GPL (as is Samba). Note that there are several graphical CVS clients
which provide a graphical interface to the sometimes mundane CVS commands.
Links to theses clients are also available from http://www.cyclic.com.</P
><P
>To gain access via anonymous cvs use the following steps.
For this example it is assumed that you want a copy of the
samba source code. For the other source code repositories
on this system just substitute the correct package name</P
><P
></P
><OL
TYPE="1"
><LI
><P
> Install a recent copy of cvs. All you really need is a
copy of the cvs client binary.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Run the command
</P
><P
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot login</B
>
</P
><P
> When it asks you for a password type <KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
>cvs</KBD
>.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Run the command
</P
><P
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co samba</B
>
</P
><P
> This will create a directory called samba containing the
latest samba source code (i.e. the HEAD tagged cvs branch). This
currently corresponds to the 3.0 development tree.
</P
><P
> CVS branches other HEAD can be obtained by using the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
>-r</VAR
>
and defining a tag name. A list of branch tag names can be found on the
"Development" page of the samba web site. A common request is to obtain the
latest 2.2 release code. This could be done by using the following command.
</P
><P
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co -r SAMBA_2_2 samba</B
>
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Whenever you want to merge in the latest code changes use
the following command from within the samba directory:
</P
><P
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>cvs update -d -P</B
>
</P
></LI
></OL
></DIV
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3380"
>23.2. Accessing the samba sources via rsync and ftp</A
></H1
><P
> pserver.samba.org also exports unpacked copies of most parts of the CVS tree at <A
HREF="ftp://pserver.samba.org/pub/unpacked"
TARGET="_top"
>ftp://pserver.samba.org/pub/unpacked</A
> and also via anonymous rsync at rsync://pserver.samba.org/ftp/unpacked/. I recommend using rsync rather than ftp.
See <A
HREF="http://rsync.samba.org/"
TARGET="_top"
>the rsync homepage</A
> for more info on rsync.
</P
><P
> The disadvantage of the unpacked trees
is that they do not support automatic
merging of local changes like CVS does.
rsync access is most convenient for an
initial install.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3386"
>23.3. Building the Binaries</A
></H1
><P
>To do this, first run the program <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>./configure
</B
> in the source directory. This should automatically
configure Samba for your operating system. If you have unusual
needs then you may wish to run</P
><P
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
>./configure --help
</KBD
></P
><P
>first to see what special options you can enable.
Then executing</P
><P
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
>make</KBD
></P
><P
>will create the binaries. Once it's successfully
compiled you can use </P
><P
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
>make install</KBD
></P
><P
>to install the binaries and manual pages. You can
separately install the binaries and/or man pages using</P
><P
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
>make installbin
</KBD
></P
><P
>and</P
><P
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
>make installman
</KBD
></P
><P
>Note that if you are upgrading for a previous version
of Samba you might like to know that the old versions of
the binaries will be renamed with a ".old" extension. You
can go back to the previous version with</P
><P
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
>make revert
</KBD
></P
><P
>if you find this version a disaster!</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3414"
>23.4. Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
></H1
><P
>You must choose to start smbd and nmbd either
as daemons or from <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>inetd</B
>. Don't try
to do both! Either you can put them in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
> inetd.conf</TT
> and have them started on demand
by <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>inetd</B
>, or you can start them as
daemons either from the command line or in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
> /etc/rc.local</TT
>. See the man pages for details
on the command line options. Take particular care to read
the bit about what user you need to be in order to start
Samba. In many cases you must be root.</P
><P
>The main advantage of starting <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
>
and <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> using the recommended daemon method
is that they will respond slightly more quickly to an initial connection
request.</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3424"
>23.4.1. Starting from inetd.conf</A
></H2
><P
>NOTE; The following will be different if
you use NIS, NIS+ or LDAP to distribute services maps.</P
><P
>Look at your <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/services</TT
>.
What is defined at port 139/tcp. If nothing is defined
then add a line like this:</P
><P
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
>netbios-ssn 139/tcp</KBD
></P
><P
>similarly for 137/udp you should have an entry like:</P
><P
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
>netbios-ns 137/udp</KBD
></P
><P
>Next edit your <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
>
and add two lines something like this:</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
> netbios-ssn stream tcp nowait root /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd smbd
netbios-ns dgram udp wait root /usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd nmbd
</PRE
></P
><P
>The exact syntax of <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
>
varies between unixes. Look at the other entries in inetd.conf
for a guide.</P
><P
>NOTE: Some unixes already have entries like netbios_ns
(note the underscore) in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/services</TT
>.
You must either edit <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/services</TT
> or
<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
> to make them consistent.</P
><P
>NOTE: On many systems you may need to use the
"interfaces" option in smb.conf to specify the IP address
and netmask of your interfaces. Run <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ifconfig</B
>
as root if you don't know what the broadcast is for your
net. <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> tries to determine it at run
time, but fails on some unixes. See the section on "testing nmbd"
for a method of finding if you need to do this.</P
><P
>!!!WARNING!!! Many unixes only accept around 5
parameters on the command line in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>inetd.conf</TT
>.
This means you shouldn't use spaces between the options and
arguments, or you should use a script, and start the script
from <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>inetd</B
>.</P
><P
>Restart <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>inetd</B
>, perhaps just send
it a HUP. If you have installed an earlier version of <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
> nmbd</B
> then you may need to kill nmbd as well.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3453"
>23.4.2. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A
></H2
><P
>To start the server as a daemon you should create
a script something like this one, perhaps calling
it <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>startsmb</TT
>.</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
> #!/bin/sh
/usr/local/samba/bin/smbd -D
/usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd -D
</PRE
></P
><P
>then make it executable with <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>chmod
+x startsmb</B
></P
><P
>You can then run <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>startsmb</B
> by
hand or execute it from <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/rc.local</TT
>
</P
><P
>To kill it send a kill signal to the processes
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> and <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
>.</P
><P
>NOTE: If you use the SVR4 style init system then
you may like to look at the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>examples/svr4-startup</TT
>
script to make Samba fit into that system.</P
></DIV
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="other-clients.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="H"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="bugreport.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Samba and other CIFS clients</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="appendixes.html"
ACCESSKEY="U"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Reporting Bugs</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

307
docs/htmldocs/cvs-access.html
View File

@ -1,307 +0,0 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Access Samba source code via CVS</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Optional configuration"
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Stackable VFS modules"
HREF="vfs.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO"
HREF="groupmapping.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="vfs.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="groupmapping.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="CHAPTER"
><H1
><A
NAME="CVS-ACCESS"
></A
>Chapter 17. Access Samba source code via CVS</H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2942"
></A
>17.1. Introduction</H1
><P
>Samba is developed in an open environment. Developers use CVS
(Concurrent Versioning System) to "checkin" (also known as
"commit") new source code. Samba's various CVS branches can
be accessed via anonymous CVS using the instructions
detailed in this chapter.</P
><P
>This document is a modified version of the instructions found at
<A
HREF="http://samba.org/samba/cvs.html"
TARGET="_top"
>http://samba.org/samba/cvs.html</A
></P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2947"
></A
>17.2. CVS Access to samba.org</H1
><P
>The machine samba.org runs a publicly accessible CVS
repository for access to the source code of several packages,
including samba, rsync and jitterbug. There are two main ways of
accessing the CVS server on this host.</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2950"
></A
>17.2.1. Access via CVSweb</H2
><P
>You can access the source code via your
favourite WWW browser. This allows you to access the contents of
individual files in the repository and also to look at the revision
history and commit logs of individual files. You can also ask for a diff
listing between any two versions on the repository.</P
><P
>Use the URL : <A
HREF="http://samba.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb"
TARGET="_top"
>http://samba.org/cgi-bin/cvsweb</A
></P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2955"
></A
>17.2.2. Access via cvs</H2
><P
>You can also access the source code via a
normal cvs client. This gives you much more control over you can
do with the repository and allows you to checkout whole source trees
and keep them up to date via normal cvs commands. This is the
preferred method of access if you are a developer and not
just a casual browser.</P
><P
>To download the latest cvs source code, point your
browser at the URL : <A
HREF="http://www.cyclic.com/"
TARGET="_top"
>http://www.cyclic.com/</A
>.
and click on the 'How to get cvs' link. CVS is free software under
the GNU GPL (as is Samba). Note that there are several graphical CVS clients
which provide a graphical interface to the sometimes mundane CVS commands.
Links to theses clients are also available from http://www.cyclic.com.</P
><P
>To gain access via anonymous cvs use the following steps.
For this example it is assumed that you want a copy of the
samba source code. For the other source code repositories
on this system just substitute the correct package name</P
><P
></P
><OL
TYPE="1"
><LI
><P
> Install a recent copy of cvs. All you really need is a
copy of the cvs client binary.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Run the command
</P
><P
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot login</B
>
</P
><P
> When it asks you for a password type <TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>cvs</B
></TT
>.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Run the command
</P
><P
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co samba</B
>
</P
><P
> This will create a directory called samba containing the
latest samba source code (i.e. the HEAD tagged cvs branch). This
currently corresponds to the 3.0 development tree.
</P
><P
> CVS branches other HEAD can be obtained by using the <TT
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-r</I
></TT
>
and defining a tag name. A list of branch tag names can be found on the
"Development" page of the samba web site. A common request is to obtain the
latest 2.2 release code. This could be done by using the following command.
</P
><P
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>cvs -d :pserver:cvs@samba.org:/cvsroot co -r SAMBA_2_2 samba</B
>
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
> Whenever you want to merge in the latest code changes use
the following command from within the samba directory:
</P
><P
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>cvs update -d -P</B
>
</P
></LI
></OL
></DIV
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="vfs.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="H"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="groupmapping.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Stackable VFS modules</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="optional.html"
ACCESSKEY="U"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Group mapping HOWTO</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

100
docs/htmldocs/diagnosis.html
View File

@ -2,10 +2,10 @@
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Diagnosing your samba server</TITLE
>The samba checklist</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -67,15 +67,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
><A
NAME="DIAGNOSIS"
></A
>Chapter 24. Diagnosing your samba server</H1
>Chapter 25. The samba checklist</H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3490"
></A
>24.1. Introduction</H1
NAME="AEN3545"
>25.1. Introduction</A
></H1
><P
>This file contains a list of tests you can perform to validate your
Samba server. It also tells you what the likely cause of the problem
@ -95,9 +95,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3495"
></A
>24.2. Assumptions</H1
NAME="AEN3550"
>25.2. Assumptions</A
></H1
><P
>In all of the tests it is assumed you have a Samba server called
BIGSERVER and a PC called ACLIENT both in workgroup TESTGROUP.</P
@ -133,17 +133,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3505"
></A
>24.3. Tests</H1
NAME="AEN3560"
>25.3. Tests</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3507"
></A
>24.3.1. Test 1</H2
NAME="AEN3562"
>25.3.1. Test 1</A
></H2
><P
>In the directory in which you store your smb.conf file, run the command
"testparm smb.conf". If it reports any errors then your smb.conf
@ -163,9 +163,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3513"
></A
>24.3.2. Test 2</H2
NAME="AEN3568"
>25.3.2. Test 2</A
></H2
><P
>Run the command "ping BIGSERVER" from the PC and "ping ACLIENT" from
the unix box. If you don't get a valid response then your TCP/IP
@ -189,9 +189,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3519"
></A
>24.3.3. Test 3</H2
NAME="AEN3574"
>25.3.3. Test 3</A
></H2
><P
>Run the command "smbclient -L BIGSERVER" on the unix box. You
should get a list of available shares back. </P
@ -260,9 +260,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3534"
></A
>24.3.4. Test 4</H2
NAME="AEN3589"
>25.3.4. Test 4</A
></H2
><P
>Run the command "nmblookup -B BIGSERVER __SAMBA__". You should get the
IP address of your Samba server back.</P
@ -281,9 +281,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3539"
></A
>24.3.5. Test 5</H2
NAME="AEN3594"
>25.3.5. Test 5</A
></H2
><P
>run the command <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -302,9 +302,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3545"
></A
>24.3.6. Test 6</H2
NAME="AEN3600"
>25.3.6. Test 6</A
></H2
><P
>Run the command <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -336,9 +336,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3553"
></A
>24.3.7. Test 7</H2
NAME="AEN3608"
>25.3.7. Test 7</A
></H2
><P
>Run the command <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -346,7 +346,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>. You should
then be prompted for a password. You should use the password of the account
you are logged into the unix box with. If you want to test with
another account then add the -U &gt;accountname&lt; option to the end of
another account then add the -U &#62;accountname&#60; option to the end of
the command line. eg:
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -412,7 +412,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
> etc.
Type <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>help &gt;command&lt;</B
>help &#62;command&#60;</B
> for instructions. You should
especially check that the amount of free disk space shown is correct
when you type <B
@ -425,9 +425,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3579"
></A
>24.3.8. Test 8</H2
NAME="AEN3634"
>25.3.8. Test 8</A
></H2
><P
>On the PC type the command <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -485,9 +485,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3596"
></A
>24.3.9. Test 9</H2
NAME="AEN3651"
>25.3.9. Test 9</A
></H2
><P
>Run the command <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -519,9 +519,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3604"
></A
>24.3.10. Test 10</H2
NAME="AEN3659"
>25.3.10. Test 10</A
></H2
><P
>Run the command <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -545,9 +545,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3610"
></A
>24.3.11. Test 11</H2
NAME="AEN3665"
>25.3.11. Test 11</A
></H2
><P
>From file manager try to browse the server. Your samba server should
appear in the browse list of your local workgroup (or the one you
@ -573,9 +573,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3615"
></A
>24.4. Still having troubles?</H1
NAME="AEN3670"
>25.4. Still having troubles?</A
></H1
><P
>Try the mailing list or newsgroup, or use the ethereal utility to
sniff the problem. The official samba mailing list can be reached at

102
docs/htmldocs/domain-security.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Samba as a NT4 or Win2k domain member</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -80,30 +80,30 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1423"
></A
>8.1. Joining an NT Domain with Samba 3.0</H1
NAME="AEN1326"
>8.1. Joining an NT Domain with Samba 3.0</A
></H1
><P
>Assume you have a Samba 3.0 server with a NetBIOS name of
<TT
<CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>SERV1</TT
>SERV1</CODE
> and are joining an or Win2k NT domain called
<TT
<CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DOM</TT
>DOM</CODE
>, which has a PDC with a NetBIOS name
of <TT
of <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DOMPDC</TT
>DOMPDC</CODE
> and two backup domain controllers
with NetBIOS names <TT
with NetBIOS names <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DOMBDC1</TT
> and <TT
>DOMBDC1</CODE
> and <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DOMBDC2
</TT
</CODE
>.</P
><P
>Firstly, you must edit your <A
@ -119,11 +119,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>Change (or add) your <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITY"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security =</I
></TT
>security =</VAR
></A
> line in the [global] section
of your smb.conf to read:</P
@ -141,11 +139,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>Next change the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
> workgroup =</I
></TT
> workgroup =</VAR
></A
> line in the [global] section to read: </P
><P
@ -159,26 +155,22 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>You must also have the parameter <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>encrypt passwords</I
></TT
>encrypt passwords</VAR
></A
> set to <TT
> set to <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>yes
</TT
</CODE
> in order for your users to authenticate to the NT PDC.</P
><P
>Finally, add (or modify) a <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDSERVER"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password server =</I
></TT
>password server =</VAR
></A
> line in the [global]
section to read: </P
@ -211,41 +203,35 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>In order to actually join the domain, you must run this
command:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>net join -S DOMPDC
-U<TT
-U<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>Administrator%password</I
></TT
></B
></TT
>Administrator%password</VAR
></KBD
></P
><P
>as we are joining the domain DOM and the PDC for that domain
(the only machine that has write access to the domain SAM database)
is DOMPDC. The <TT
is DOMPDC. The <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>Administrator%password</I
></TT
>Administrator%password</VAR
> is
the login name and password for an account which has the necessary
privilege to add machines to the domain. If this is successful
you will see the message:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT"
>Joined domain DOM.</TT
>Joined domain DOM.</SAMP
>
or <TT
or <SAMP
CLASS="COMPUTEROUTPUT"
>Joined 'SERV1' to realm 'MYREALM'</TT
>Joined 'SERV1' to realm 'MYREALM'</SAMP
>
</P
><P
@ -282,9 +268,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1478"
></A
>8.2. Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</H1
NAME="AEN1381"
>8.2. Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A
></H1
><P
>Many people have asked regarding the state of Samba's ability to participate in
a Windows 2000 Domain. Samba 3.0 is able to act as a member server of a Windows
@ -296,16 +282,16 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1481"
></A
>8.3. Why is this better than security = server?</H1
NAME="AEN1384"
>8.3. Why is this better than security = server?</A
></H1
><P
>Currently, domain security in Samba doesn't free you from
having to create local Unix users to represent the users attaching
to your server. This means that if domain user <TT
to your server. This means that if domain user <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DOM\fred
</TT
</CODE
> attaches to your domain security Samba server, there needs
to be a local Unix user fred to represent that user in the Unix
filesystem. This is very similar to the older Samba security mode

22
docs/htmldocs/findsmb.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>findsmb</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -110,9 +110,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>nmblookup</SPAN
>(1)</SPAN
>
will be called with <TT
will be called with <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>-B</TT
>-B</CODE
> option.</P
></DD
><DT
@ -139,9 +139,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>nmblookup</SPAN
>(1)</SPAN
>
as part of the <TT
as part of the <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>-B</TT
>-B</CODE
> option.</P
></DD
></DL
@ -174,9 +174,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
not show any information about the operating system or server
version.</P
><P
>The command with <TT
>The command with <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>-r</TT
>-r</CODE
> option
must be run on a system without <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
@ -192,9 +192,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
> is running on the system, you will
only get the IP address and the DNS name of the machine. To
get proper responses from Windows 95 and Windows 98 machines,
the command must be run as root and with <TT
the command must be run as root and with <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>-r</TT
>-r</CODE
>
option on a machine without <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -205,9 +205,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
CLASS="COMMAND"
>findsmb</B
>
without <TT
without <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>-r</TT
>-r</CODE
> option set would yield output similar
to the following</P
><PRE

14
docs/htmldocs/groupmapping.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Group mapping HOWTO</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -13,8 +13,8 @@ REL="UP"
TITLE="Optional configuration"
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Access Samba source code via CVS"
HREF="cvs-access.html"><LINK
TITLE="Stackable VFS modules"
HREF="vfs.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Samba performance issues"
HREF="speed.html"></HEAD
@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="cvs-access.html"
HREF="vfs.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
@ -74,7 +74,7 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
><A
NAME="GROUPMAPPING"
></A
>Chapter 18. Group mapping HOWTO</H1
>Chapter 17. Group mapping HOWTO</H1
><P
>
Starting with Samba 3.0 alpha 2, a new group mapping function is available. The
@ -185,7 +185,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="cvs-access.html"
HREF="vfs.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
@ -213,7 +213,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="N"
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Access Samba source code via CVS</TD
>Stackable VFS modules</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"

73
docs/htmldocs/groupprofiles.html
View File

@ -2,10 +2,10 @@
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Creating Group Profiles</TITLE
>Creating Group Prolicy Files</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -16,8 +16,8 @@ REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Samba performance issues"
HREF="speed.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Appendixes"
HREF="appendixes.html"></HEAD
TITLE="Securing Samba"
HREF="securing-samba.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="appendixes.html"
HREF="securing-samba.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
@ -74,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
><A
NAME="GROUPPROFILES"
></A
>Chapter 20. Creating Group Profiles</H1
>Chapter 19. Creating Group Prolicy Files</H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3123"
></A
>20.1. Windows '9x</H1
NAME="AEN2980"
>19.1. Windows '9x</A
></H1
><P
>You need the Win98 Group Policy Editor to
set Group Profiles up under Windows '9x. It can be found on the Original
@ -106,25 +106,28 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
> that needs to be placed in
the root of the [NETLOGON] share. If your Win98 is configured to log onto
the Samba Domain, it will automatically read this file and update the
Win98 registry of the machine that is logging on.</P
Win9x/Me registry of the machine that is logging on.</P
><P
>All of this is covered in the Win98 Resource Kit documentation.</P
><P
>If you do not do it this way, then every so often Win98 will check the
>If you do not do it this way, then every so often Win9x/Me will check the
integrity of the registry and will restore it's settings from the back-up
copy of the registry it stores on each Win98 machine. Hence, you will notice
things changing back to the original settings.</P
copy of the registry it stores on each Win9x/Me machine. Hence, you will
occasionally notice things changing back to the original settings.</P
><P
>The following all refers to Windows NT/200x profile migration - not to policies.
We need a separate section on policies (NTConfig.Pol) for NT4/200x.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3132"
></A
>20.2. Windows NT 4</H1
NAME="AEN2990"
>19.2. Windows NT 4</A
></H1
><P
>Unfortunately, the Resource Kit info is Win NT4/2K version specific.</P
>Unfortunately, the Resource Kit info is Win NT4 or 200x specific.</P
><P
>Here is a quick guide:</P
><P
@ -159,7 +162,7 @@ ALT="Note"></TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
><P
>I am using the term &quot;migrate&quot; lossely. You can copy a profile to
>I am using the term "migrate" lossely. You can copy a profile to
create a group profile. You can give the user 'Everyone' rights to the
profile you copy this to. That is what you need to do, since your samba
domain is not a member of a trust relationship with your NT4 PDC.</P
@ -201,9 +204,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3155"
></A
>20.2.1. Side bar Notes</H2
NAME="AEN3013"
>19.2.1. Side bar Notes</A
></H2
><P
>You should obtain the SID of your NT4 domain. You can use smbpasswd to do
this. Read the man page.</P
@ -217,9 +220,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3159"
></A
>20.2.2. Mandatory profiles</H2
NAME="AEN3017"
>19.2.2. Mandatory profiles</A
></H2
><P
>The above method can be used to create mandatory profiles also. To convert
a group profile into a mandatory profile simply locate the NTUser.DAT file
@ -230,9 +233,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3162"
></A
>20.2.3. moveuser.exe</H2
NAME="AEN3020"
>19.2.3. moveuser.exe</A
></H2
><P
>The W2K professional resource kit has moveuser.exe. moveuser.exe changes
the security of a profile from one user to another. This allows the account
@ -243,9 +246,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3165"
></A
>20.2.4. Get SID</H2
NAME="AEN3023"
>19.2.4. Get SID</A
></H2
><P
>You can identify the SID by using GetSID.exe from the Windows NT Server 4.0
Resource Kit.</P
@ -266,9 +269,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3170"
></A
>20.3. Windows 2000/XP</H1
NAME="AEN3028"
>19.3. Windows 2000/XP</A
></H1
><P
>You must first convert the profile from a local profile to a domain
profile on the MS Windows workstation as follows:</P
@ -532,7 +535,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="appendixes.html"
HREF="securing-samba.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
@ -556,7 +559,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Appendixes</TD
>Securing Samba</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV

152
docs/htmldocs/improved-browsing.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Improved browsing in samba</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2700"
></A
>15.1. Overview of browsing</H1
NAME="AEN2603"
>15.1. Overview of browsing</A
></H1
><P
>SMB networking provides a mechanism by which clients can access a list
of machines in a network, a so-called "browse list". This list
@ -93,8 +93,13 @@ list is heavily used by all SMB clients. Configuration of SMB
browsing has been problematic for some Samba users, hence this
document.</P
><P
>Browsing will NOT work if name resolution from NetBIOS names to IP
addresses does not function correctly. Use of a WINS server is highly
>MS Windows 2000 and later, as with Samba-3 and later, can be
configured to not use NetBIOS over TCP/IP. When configured this way
it is imperative that name resolution (using DNS/LDAP/ADS) be correctly
configured and operative. Browsing will NOT work if name resolution
from SMB machine names to IP addresses does not function correctly.</P
><P
>Where NetBIOS over TCP/IP is enabled use of a WINS server is highly
recommended to aid the resolution of NetBIOS (SMB) names to IP addresses.
WINS allows remote segment clients to obtain NetBIOS name_type information
that can NOT be provided by any other means of name resolution.</P
@ -104,16 +109,14 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2704"
></A
>15.2. Browsing support in samba</H1
NAME="AEN2608"
>15.2. Browsing support in samba</A
></H1
><P
>Samba now fully supports browsing. The browsing is supported by nmbd
and is also controlled by options in the smb.conf file (see smb.conf(5)).</P
><P
>Samba can act as a local browse master for a workgroup and the ability
for samba to support domain logons and scripts is now available. See
DOMAIN.txt for more information on domain logons.</P
>Samba facilitates browsing. The browsing is supported by nmbd
and is also controlled by options in the smb.conf file (see smb.conf(5)).
Samba can act as a local browse master for a workgroup and the ability
for samba to support domain logons and scripts is now available.</P
><P
>Samba can also act as a domain master browser for a workgroup. This
means that it will collate lists from local browse masters into a
@ -128,12 +131,12 @@ regardless of whether it is NT, Samba or any other type of domain master
that is providing this service.</P
><P
>[Note that nmbd can be configured as a WINS server, but it is not
necessary to specifically use samba as your WINS server. NTAS can
be configured as your WINS server. In a mixed NT server and
samba environment on a Wide Area Network, it is recommended that
you use the NT server's WINS server capabilities. In a samba-only
environment, it is recommended that you use one and only one nmbd
as your WINS server].</P
necessary to specifically use samba as your WINS server. MS Windows
NT4, Server or Advanced Server 2000 or 2003 can be configured as
your WINS server. In a mixed NT/2000/2003 server and samba environment on
a Wide Area Network, it is recommended that you use the Microsoft
WINS server capabilities. In a samba-only environment, it is
recommended that you use one and only one Samba server as your WINS server.</P
><P
>To get browsing to work you need to run nmbd as usual, but will need
to use the "workgroup" option in smb.conf to control what workgroup
@ -149,9 +152,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2713"
></A
>15.3. Problem resolution</H1
NAME="AEN2616"
>15.3. Problem resolution</A
></H1
><P
>If something doesn't work then hopefully the log.nmb file will help
you track down the problem. Try a debug level of 2 or 3 for finding
@ -167,6 +170,19 @@ filemanager should display the list of available shares.</P
connection that lists the shares is done as guest, and thus you must
have a valid guest account.</P
><P
><SPAN
CLASS="emphasis"
><I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
>MS Windows 2000 and upwards (as with Samba) can be configured to disallow
anonymous (ie: Guest account) access to the IPC$ share. In that case, the
MS Windows 2000/XP/2003 machine acting as an SMB/CIFS client will use the
name of the currently logged in user to query the IPC$ share. MS Windows
9X clients are not able to do this and thus will NOT be able to browse
server resources.</I
></SPAN
></P
><P
>Also, a lot of people are getting bitten by the problem of too many
parameters on the command line of nmbd in inetd.conf. This trick is to
not use spaces between the option and the parameter (eg: -d2 instead
@ -183,11 +199,11 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2720"
></A
>15.4. Browsing across subnets</H1
NAME="AEN2625"
>15.4. Browsing across subnets</A
></H1
><P
>With the release of Samba 1.9.17(alpha1 and above) Samba has been
>Since the release of Samba 1.9.17(alpha1) Samba has been
updated to enable it to support the replication of browse lists
across subnet boundaries. New code and options have been added to
achieve this. This section describes how to set this feature up
@ -214,15 +230,14 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2725"
></A
>15.4.1. How does cross subnet browsing work ?</H2
NAME="AEN2630"
>15.4.1. How does cross subnet browsing work ?</A
></H2
><P
>Cross subnet browsing is a complicated dance, containing multiple
moving parts. It has taken Microsoft several years to get the code
that achieves this correct, and Samba lags behind in some areas.
However, with the 1.9.17 release, Samba is capable of cross subnet
browsing when configured correctly.</P
Samba is capable of cross subnet browsing when configured correctly.</P
><P
>Consider a network set up as follows :</P
><P
@ -303,7 +318,7 @@ machine is seen across any of the subnets.</P
master browser it looks for a Domain master browser to synchronize
its browse list with. It does this by querying the WINS server
(N2_D) for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name
WORKGROUP&gt;1B&lt;. This name was registerd by the Domain master
WORKGROUP&#62;1B&#60;. This name was registerd by the Domain master
browser (N1_C) with the WINS server as soon as it was booted.</P
><P
>Once N2_B knows the address of the Domain master browser it
@ -426,9 +441,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2760"
></A
>15.5. Setting up a WINS server</H1
NAME="AEN2665"
>15.5. Setting up a WINS server</A
></H1
><P
>Either a Samba machine or a Windows NT Server machine may be set up
as a WINS server. To set a Samba machine to be a WINS server you must
@ -440,9 +455,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
> wins support = yes</B
></P
><P
>Versions of Samba previous to 1.9.17 had this parameter default to
>Versions of Samba prior to 1.9.17 had this parameter default to
yes. If you have any older versions of Samba on your network it is
strongly suggested you upgrade to 1.9.17 or above, or at the very
strongly suggested you upgrade to a recent version, or at the very
least set the parameter to 'no' on all these machines.</P
><P
>Machines with "<B
@ -480,10 +495,10 @@ all smb.conf files :</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>wins server = &gt;name or IP address&lt;</B
>wins server = &#62;name or IP address&#60;</B
></P
><P
>where &gt;name or IP address&lt; is either the DNS name of the WINS server
>where &#62;name or IP address&#60; is either the DNS name of the WINS server
machine or its IP address.</P
><P
>Note that this line MUST NOT BE SET in the smb.conf file of the Samba
@ -494,7 +509,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>" option and the
"<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>wins server = &gt;name&lt;</B
>wins server = &#60;name&#62;</B
>" option then
nmbd will fail to start.</P
><P
@ -509,9 +524,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2779"
></A
>15.6. Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</H1
NAME="AEN2684"
>15.6. Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</A
></H1
><P
>To set up cross subnet browsing on a network containing machines
in up to be in a WORKGROUP, not an NT Domain you need to set up one
@ -552,11 +567,12 @@ server, if you require.</P
><P
>Next, you should ensure that each of the subnets contains a
machine that can act as a local master browser for the
workgroup. Any NT machine should be able to do this, as will
Windows 95 machines (although these tend to get rebooted more
often, so it's not such a good idea to use these). To make a
Samba server a local master browser set the following
options in the [global] section of the smb.conf file :</P
workgroup. Any MS Windows NT/2K/XP/2003 machine should be
able to do this, as will Windows 9x machines (although these
tend to get rebooted more often, so it's not such a good idea
to use these). To make a Samba server a local master browser
set the following options in the [global] section of the
smb.conf file :</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
@ -593,16 +609,16 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2797"
></A
>15.7. Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</H1
NAME="AEN2702"
>15.7. Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</A
></H1
><P
>If you are adding Samba servers to a Windows NT Domain then
you must not set up a Samba server as a domain master browser.
By default, a Windows NT Primary Domain Controller for a Domain
name is also the Domain master browser for that name, and many
things will break if a Samba server registers the Domain master
browser NetBIOS name (DOMAIN&gt;1B&lt;) with WINS instead of the PDC.</P
browser NetBIOS name (DOMAIN&#60;1B&#62;) with WINS instead of the PDC.</P
><P
>For subnets other than the one containing the Windows NT PDC
you may set up Samba servers as local master browsers as
@ -644,9 +660,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2807"
></A
>15.8. Forcing samba to be the master</H1
NAME="AEN2712"
>15.8. Forcing samba to be the master</A
></H1
><P
>Who becomes the "master browser" is determined by an election process
using broadcasts. Each election packet contains a number of parameters
@ -659,8 +675,8 @@ option in smb.conf to a higher number. It defaults to 0. Using 34
would make it win all elections over every other system (except other
samba systems!)</P
><P
>A "os level" of 2 would make it beat WfWg and Win95, but not NTAS. A
NTAS domain controller uses level 32.</P
>A "os level" of 2 would make it beat WfWg and Win95, but not MS Windows
NT/2K Server. A MS Windows NT/2K Server domain controller uses level 32.</P
><P
>The maximum os level is 255</P
><P
@ -692,9 +708,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2816"
></A
>15.9. Making samba the domain master</H1
NAME="AEN2721"
>15.9. Making samba the domain master</A
></H1
><P
>The domain master is responsible for collating the browse lists of
multiple subnets so that browsing can occur between subnets. You can
@ -765,9 +781,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2834"
></A
>15.10. Note about broadcast addresses</H1
NAME="AEN2739"
>15.10. Note about broadcast addresses</A
></H1
><P
>If your network uses a "0" based broadcast address (for example if it
ends in a 0) then you will strike problems. Windows for Workgroups
@ -779,9 +795,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2837"
></A
>15.11. Multiple interfaces</H1
NAME="AEN2742"
>15.11. Multiple interfaces</A
></H1
><P
>Samba now supports machines with multiple network interfaces. If you
have multiple interfaces then you will need to use the "interfaces"

672
docs/htmldocs/install.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>How to Install and Test SAMBA</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -81,166 +81,50 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN26"
></A
>1.1. Read the man pages</H1
>1.1. Obtaining and installing samba</A
></H1
><P
>The man pages distributed with SAMBA contain
lots of useful info that will help to get you started.
If you don't know how to read man pages then try
something like:</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>$ </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>man smbd.8</B
></TT
>
or
<TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>$ </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>nroff -man smbd.8 | more
</B
></TT
> on older unixes.</P
><P
>Other sources of information are pointed to
by the Samba web site,<A
HREF="http://www.samba.org/"
>Binary packages of samba are included in almost any Linux or
Unix distribution. There are also some packages available at
<A
HREF="http://samba.org/"
TARGET="_top"
> http://www.samba.org</A
></P
>the samba homepage</A
>
</P
><P
>If you need to compile samba from source, check the
appropriate appendix chapter.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN31"
>1.2. Configuring samba</A
></H1
><P
>Samba's configuration is stored in the smb.conf file,
that usually resides in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/samba/smb.conf</TT
>
or <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/usr/local/samba/lib/smb.conf</TT
>. You can either
edit this file yourself or do it using one of the many graphical
tools that are available, such as the web-based interface swat, that
is included with samba.</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN36"
></A
>1.2. Building the Binaries</H1
><P
>To do this, first run the program <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>./configure
</B
> in the source directory. This should automatically
configure Samba for your operating system. If you have unusual
needs then you may wish to run</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>./configure --help
</B
></TT
></P
><P
>first to see what special options you can enable.
Then executing</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>make</B
></TT
></P
><P
>will create the binaries. Once it's successfully
compiled you can use </P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>make install</B
></TT
></P
><P
>to install the binaries and manual pages. You can
separately install the binaries and/or man pages using</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>make installbin
</B
></TT
></P
><P
>and</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>make installman
</B
></TT
></P
><P
>Note that if you are upgrading for a previous version
of Samba you might like to know that the old versions of
the binaries will be renamed with a ".old" extension. You
can go back to the previous version with</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>make revert
</B
></TT
></P
><P
>if you find this version a disaster!</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN64"
></A
>1.3. The all important step</H1
><P
>At this stage you must fetch yourself a
coffee or other drink you find stimulating. Getting the rest
of the install right can sometimes be tricky, so you will
probably need it.</P
><P
>If you have installed samba before then you can skip
this step.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN68"
></A
>1.4. Create the smb configuration file.</H1
>1.2.1. Editing the smb.conf file</A
></H2
><P
>There are sample configuration files in the examples
subdirectory in the distribution. I suggest you read them
@ -288,19 +172,18 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
><P
>For more information about security settings for the
[homes] share please refer to the document UNIX_SECURITY.txt.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN82"
></A
>1.5. Test your config file with
NAME="AEN50"
>1.2.1.1. Test your config file with
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>testparm</B
></H1
></A
></H3
><P
>It's important that you test the validity of your
<TT
@ -319,231 +202,55 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
>!</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN90"
></A
>1.6. Starting the smbd and nmbd</H1
><P
>You must choose to start smbd and nmbd either
as daemons or from <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>inetd</B
>. Don't try
to do both! Either you can put them in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
> inetd.conf</TT
> and have them started on demand
by <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>inetd</B
>, or you can start them as
daemons either from the command line or in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
> /etc/rc.local</TT
>. See the man pages for details
on the command line options. Take particular care to read
the bit about what user you need to be in order to start
Samba. In many cases you must be root.</P
><P
>The main advantage of starting <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
>
and <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> using the recommended daemon method
is that they will respond slightly more quickly to an initial connection
request.</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN100"
></A
>1.6.1. Starting from inetd.conf</H2
><P
>NOTE; The following will be different if
you use NIS or NIS+ to distributed services maps.</P
><P
>Look at your <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/services</TT
>.
What is defined at port 139/tcp. If nothing is defined
then add a line like this:</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>netbios-ssn 139/tcp</B
></TT
></P
><P
>similarly for 137/udp you should have an entry like:</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>netbios-ns 137/udp</B
></TT
></P
><P
>Next edit your <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
>
and add two lines something like this:</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
> netbios-ssn stream tcp nowait root /usr/local/samba/bin/smbd smbd
netbios-ns dgram udp wait root /usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd nmbd
</PRE
></P
><P
>The exact syntax of <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
>
varies between unixes. Look at the other entries in inetd.conf
for a guide.</P
><P
>NOTE: Some unixes already have entries like netbios_ns
(note the underscore) in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/services</TT
>.
You must either edit <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/services</TT
> or
<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/inetd.conf</TT
> to make them consistent.</P
><P
>NOTE: On many systems you may need to use the
"interfaces" option in smb.conf to specify the IP address
and netmask of your interfaces. Run <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ifconfig</B
>
as root if you don't know what the broadcast is for your
net. <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> tries to determine it at run
time, but fails on some unixes. See the section on "testing nmbd"
for a method of finding if you need to do this.</P
><P
>!!!WARNING!!! Many unixes only accept around 5
parameters on the command line in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>inetd.conf</TT
>.
This means you shouldn't use spaces between the options and
arguments, or you should use a script, and start the script
from <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>inetd</B
>.</P
><P
>Restart <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>inetd</B
>, perhaps just send
it a HUP. If you have installed an earlier version of <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
> nmbd</B
> then you may need to kill nmbd as well.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN129"
></A
>1.6.2. Alternative: starting it as a daemon</H2
NAME="AEN58"
>1.2.2. SWAT</A
></H2
><P
>To start the server as a daemon you should create
a script something like this one, perhaps calling
it <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>startsmb</TT
>.</P
> SWAT is a web-based interface that helps you configure samba.
SWAT might not be available in the samba package on your platform,
but in a seperate package. Please read the swat manpage
on compiling, installing and configuring swat from source.
</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
> #!/bin/sh
/usr/local/samba/bin/smbd -D
/usr/local/samba/bin/nmbd -D
</PRE
></P
><P
>then make it executable with <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>chmod
+x startsmb</B
></P
><P
>You can then run <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>startsmb</B
> by
hand or execute it from <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/rc.local</TT
>
</P
><P
>To kill it send a kill signal to the processes
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> and <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
>.</P
><P
>NOTE: If you use the SVR4 style init system then
you may like to look at the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>examples/svr4-startup</TT
>
script to make Samba fit into that system.</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN145"
></A
>1.7. Try listing the shares available on your
server</H1
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>$ </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>smbclient -L
<TT
>To launch SWAT just run your favorite web browser and
point it at "http://localhost:901/". Replace <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>yourhostname</I
></TT
></B
></TT
>localhost</VAR
> with the name of the computer you are running samba on if you
are running samba on a different computer then your browser.</P
><P
>Note that you can attach to SWAT from any IP connected
machine but connecting from a remote machine leaves your
connection open to password sniffing as passwords will be sent
in the clear over the wire. </P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN64"
>1.3. Try listing the shares available on your
server</A
></H1
><P
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>$ </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
>smbclient -L
<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
>yourhostname</VAR
></KBD
></P
><P
>You should get back a list of shares available on
@ -566,39 +273,31 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN154"
></A
>1.8. Try connecting with the unix client</H1
NAME="AEN73"
>1.4. Try connecting with the unix client</A
></H1
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>$ </TT
><TT
>$ </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>smbclient <TT
>smbclient <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
> //yourhostname/aservice</I
></TT
></B
></TT
> //yourhostname/aservice</VAR
></KBD
></P
><P
>Typically the <TT
>Typically the <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>yourhostname</I
></TT
>yourhostname</VAR
>
would be the name of the host where you installed <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
> smbd</B
>. The <TT
>. The <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>aservice</I
></TT
>aservice</VAR
> is
any service you have defined in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
@ -613,15 +312,13 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>For example if your unix host is bambi and your login
name is fred you would type:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>$ </TT
><TT
>$ </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>smbclient //bambi/fred
</B
></TT
</KBD
></P
></DIV
><DIV
@ -629,46 +326,40 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN170"
></A
>1.9. Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</H1
NAME="AEN89"
>1.5. Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A
></H1
><P
>Try mounting disks. eg:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </TT
><TT
>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>net use d: \\servername\service
</B
></TT
</KBD
></P
><P
>Try printing. eg:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </TT
><TT
>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>net use lpt1:
\\servername\spoolservice</B
></TT
\\servername\spoolservice</KBD
></P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </TT
><TT
>C:\WINDOWS\&#62; </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>print filename
</B
></TT
</KBD
></P
><P
>Celebrate, or send me a bug report!</P
@ -678,55 +369,41 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN184"
></A
>1.10. What If Things Don't Work?</H1
NAME="AEN103"
>1.6. What If Things Don't Work?</A
></H1
><P
>If nothing works and you start to think "who wrote
this pile of trash" then I suggest you do step 2 again (and
again) till you calm down.</P
><P
>Then you might read the file DIAGNOSIS.txt and the
>Then you might read the file HOWTO chapter Diagnosis and the
FAQ. If you are still stuck then try the mailing list or
newsgroup (look in the README for details). Samba has been
successfully installed at thousands of sites worldwide, so maybe
someone else has hit your problem and has overcome it. You could
also use the WWW site to scan back issues of the samba-digest.</P
><P
>When you fix the problem PLEASE send me some updates to the
documentation (or source code) so that the next person will find it
easier. </P
>When you fix the problem <SPAN
CLASS="emphasis"
><I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
>please</I
></SPAN
> send some
updates of the documentation (or source code) to one of
the documentation maintainers or the list.
</P
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN189"
></A
>1.10.1. Diagnosing Problems</H2
><P
>If you have installation problems then go to the
<A
HREF="Diagnosis.html"
TARGET="_top"
>Diagnosis</A
> chapter to try to find the
problem.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN193"
></A
>1.10.2. Scope IDs</H2
NAME="AEN108"
>1.6.1. Scope IDs</A
></H2
><P
>By default Samba uses a blank scope ID. This means
all your windows boxes must also have a blank scope ID.
If you really want to use a non-blank scope ID then you will
need to use the 'netbios scope' smb.conf option.
All your PCs will need to have the same setting for
All your PCs will need to have the same setting for
this to work. I do not recommend scope IDs.</P
></DIV
><DIV
@ -734,71 +411,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN196"
></A
>1.10.3. Choosing the Protocol Level</H2
><P
>The SMB protocol has many dialects. Currently
Samba supports 5, called CORE, COREPLUS, LANMAN1,
LANMAN2 and NT1.</P
><P
>You can choose what maximum protocol to support
in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> file. The default is
NT1 and that is the best for the vast majority of sites.</P
><P
>In older versions of Samba you may have found it
necessary to use COREPLUS. The limitations that led to
this have mostly been fixed. It is now less likely that you
will want to use less than LANMAN1. The only remaining advantage
of COREPLUS is that for some obscure reason WfWg preserves
the case of passwords in this protocol, whereas under LANMAN1,
LANMAN2 or NT1 it uppercases all passwords before sending them,
forcing you to use the "password level=" option in some cases.</P
><P
>The main advantage of LANMAN2 and NT1 is support for
long filenames with some clients (eg: smbclient, Windows NT
or Win95). </P
><P
>See the smb.conf(5) manual page for more details.</P
><P
>Note: To support print queue reporting you may find
that you have to use TCP/IP as the default protocol under
WfWg. For some reason if you leave Netbeui as the default
it may break the print queue reporting on some systems.
It is presumably a WfWg bug.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN205"
></A
>1.10.4. Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</H2
><P
>To use a printer that is available via a smb-based
server from a unix host with LPR you will need to compile the
smbclient program. You then need to install the script
"smbprint". Read the instruction in smbprint for more details.
</P
><P
>There is also a SYSV style script that does much
the same thing called smbprint.sysv. It contains instructions.</P
><P
>See the CUPS manual for information about setting up
printing from a unix host with CUPS to a smb-based server. </P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN210"
></A
>1.10.5. Locking</H2
NAME="AEN111"
>1.6.2. Locking</A
></H2
><P
>One area which sometimes causes trouble is locking.</P
><P
@ -851,19 +466,6 @@ NAME="AEN210"
or DENY_ALL. There are also special compatibility modes called
DENY_FCB and DENY_DOS.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN219"
></A
>1.10.6. Mapping Usernames</H2
><P
>If you have different usernames on the PCs and
the unix server then take a look at the "username map" option.
See the smb.conf man page for details.</P
></DIV
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV

188
docs/htmldocs/integrate-ms-networks.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1513"
></A
>9.1. Agenda</H1
NAME="AEN1416"
>9.1. Agenda</A
></H1
><P
>To identify the key functional mechanisms of MS Windows networking
to enable the deployment of Samba as a means of extending and/or
@ -147,9 +147,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1535"
></A
>9.2. Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</H1
NAME="AEN1438"
>9.2. Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A
></H1
><P
>The key configuration files covered in this section are:</P
><P
@ -189,11 +189,11 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1551"
></A
NAME="AEN1454"
>9.2.1. <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/hosts</TT
></A
></H2
><P
>Contains a static list of IP Addresses and names.
@ -270,11 +270,11 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1567"
></A
NAME="AEN1470"
>9.2.2. <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/resolv.conf</TT
></A
></H2
><P
>This file tells the name resolution libraries:</P
@ -308,11 +308,11 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1578"
></A
NAME="AEN1481"
>9.2.3. <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/host.conf</TT
></A
></H2
><P
><TT
@ -337,11 +337,11 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1586"
></A
NAME="AEN1489"
>9.2.4. <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT
></A
></H2
><P
>This file controls the actual name resolution targets. The
@ -406,9 +406,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1598"
></A
>9.3. Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</H1
NAME="AEN1501"
>9.3. Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A
></H1
><P
>MS Windows networking is predicated about the name each machine
is given. This name is known variously (and inconsistently) as
@ -428,16 +428,16 @@ the client/server.</P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
> Unique NetBIOS Names:
MACHINENAME&lt;00&gt; = Server Service is running on MACHINENAME
MACHINENAME&lt;03&gt; = Generic Machine Name (NetBIOS name)
MACHINENAME&lt;20&gt; = LanMan Server service is running on MACHINENAME
WORKGROUP&lt;1b&gt; = Domain Master Browser
MACHINENAME&#60;00&#62; = Server Service is running on MACHINENAME
MACHINENAME&#60;03&#62; = Generic Machine Name (NetBIOS name)
MACHINENAME&#60;20&#62; = LanMan Server service is running on MACHINENAME
WORKGROUP&#60;1b&#62; = Domain Master Browser
Group Names:
WORKGROUP&lt;03&gt; = Generic Name registered by all members of WORKGROUP
WORKGROUP&lt;1c&gt; = Domain Controllers / Netlogon Servers
WORKGROUP&lt;1d&gt; = Local Master Browsers
WORKGROUP&lt;1e&gt; = Internet Name Resolvers</PRE
WORKGROUP&#60;03&#62; = Generic Name registered by all members of WORKGROUP
WORKGROUP&#60;1c&#62; = Domain Controllers / Netlogon Servers
WORKGROUP&#60;1d&#62; = Local Master Browsers
WORKGROUP&#60;1e&#62; = Internet Name Resolvers</PRE
></P
><P
>It should be noted that all NetBIOS machines register their own
@ -456,7 +456,7 @@ be needed. An example of this is what happens when an MS Windows client
wants to locate a domain logon server. It find this service and the IP
address of a server that provides it by performing a lookup (via a
NetBIOS broadcast) for enumeration of all machines that have
registered the name type *&lt;1c&gt;. A logon request is then sent to each
registered the name type *&#60;1c&#62;. A logon request is then sent to each
IP address that is returned in the enumerated list of IP addresses. Which
ever machine first replies then ends up providing the logon services.</P
><P
@ -491,9 +491,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1610"
></A
>9.3.1. The NetBIOS Name Cache</H2
NAME="AEN1513"
>9.3.1. The NetBIOS Name Cache</A
></H2
><P
>All MS Windows machines employ an in memory buffer in which is
stored the NetBIOS names and IP addresses for all external
@ -518,9 +518,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1615"
></A
>9.3.2. The LMHOSTS file</H2
NAME="AEN1518"
>9.3.2. The LMHOSTS file</A
></H2
><P
>This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or
2000 in <TT
@ -555,8 +555,8 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
# files and offers the following extensions:
#
# #PRE
# #DOM:&lt;domain&gt;
# #INCLUDE &lt;filename&gt;
# #DOM:&#60;domain&#62;
# #INCLUDE &#60;filename&#62;
# #BEGIN_ALTERNATE
# #END_ALTERNATE
# \0xnn (non-printing character support)
@ -565,16 +565,16 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
# the entry to be preloaded into the name cache. By default, entries are
# not preloaded, but are parsed only after dynamic name resolution fails.
#
# Following an entry with the "#DOM:&lt;domain&gt;" tag will associate the
# entry with the domain specified by &lt;domain&gt;. This affects how the
# Following an entry with the "#DOM:&#60;domain&#62;" tag will associate the
# entry with the domain specified by &#60;domain&#62;. This affects how the
# browser and logon services behave in TCP/IP environments. To preload
# the host name associated with #DOM entry, it is necessary to also add a
# #PRE to the line. The &lt;domain&gt; is always preloaded although it will not
# #PRE to the line. The &#60;domain&#62; is always preloaded although it will not
# be shown when the name cache is viewed.
#
# Specifying "#INCLUDE &lt;filename&gt;" will force the RFC NetBIOS (NBT)
# software to seek the specified &lt;filename&gt; and parse it as if it were
# local. &lt;filename&gt; is generally a UNC-based name, allowing a
# Specifying "#INCLUDE &#60;filename&#62;" will force the RFC NetBIOS (NBT)
# software to seek the specified &#60;filename&#62; and parse it as if it were
# local. &#60;filename&#62; is generally a UNC-based name, allowing a
# centralized lmhosts file to be maintained on a server.
# It is ALWAYS necessary to provide a mapping for the IP address of the
# server prior to the #INCLUDE. This mapping must use the #PRE directive.
@ -621,9 +621,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1623"
></A
>9.3.3. HOSTS file</H2
NAME="AEN1526"
>9.3.3. HOSTS file</A
></H2
><P
>This file is usually located in MS Windows NT 4.0 or 2000 in
<TT
@ -643,9 +643,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1628"
></A
>9.3.4. DNS Lookup</H2
NAME="AEN1531"
>9.3.4. DNS Lookup</A
></H2
><P
>This capability is configured in the TCP/IP setup area in the network
configuration facility. If enabled an elaborate name resolution sequence
@ -663,9 +663,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1631"
></A
>9.3.5. WINS Lookup</H2
NAME="AEN1534"
>9.3.5. WINS Lookup</A
></H2
><P
>A WINS (Windows Internet Name Server) service is the equivaent of the
rfc1001/1002 specified NBNS (NetBIOS Name Server). A WINS server stores
@ -692,11 +692,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
wins server = xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx</PRE
></P
><P
>where <TT
>where <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx</I
></TT
>xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx</VAR
> is the IP address
of the WINS server.</P
></DIV
@ -706,10 +704,10 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1643"
></A
NAME="AEN1546"
>9.4. How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and
dependable browsing using Samba</H1
dependable browsing using Samba</A
></H1
><P
>As stated above, MS Windows machines register their NetBIOS names
(i.e.: the machine name for each service type in operation) on start
@ -773,10 +771,10 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1653"
></A
NAME="AEN1556"
>9.5. MS Windows security options and how to configure
Samba for seemless integration</H1
Samba for seemless integration</A
></H1
><P
>MS Windows clients may use encrypted passwords as part of a
challenege/response authentication model (a.k.a. NTLMv1) or
@ -845,43 +843,35 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PASSWORDLEVEL"
TARGET="_top"
>passsword level</A
> = <TT
> = <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>integer</I
></TT
>integer</VAR
>
<A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#USERNAMELEVEL"
TARGET="_top"
>username level</A
> = <TT
> = <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>integer</I
></TT
>integer</VAR
></PRE
></P
><P
>By default Samba will lower case the username before attempting
to lookup the user in the database of local system accounts.
Because UNIX usernames conventionally only contain lower case
character, the <TT
character, the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username level</I
></TT
>username level</VAR
> parameter
is rarely even needed.</P
><P
>However, password on UNIX systems often make use of mixed case
characters. This means that in order for a user on a Windows 9x
client to connect to a Samba server using clear text authentication,
the <TT
the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password level</I
></TT
>password level</VAR
> must be set to the maximum
number of upper case letter which <SPAN
CLASS="emphasis"
@ -891,11 +881,9 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
></SPAN
> appear
is a password. Note that is the server OS uses the traditional
DES version of crypt(), then a <TT
DES version of crypt(), then a <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>password level</I
></TT
>password level</VAR
>
of 8 will result in case insensitive passwords as seen from Windows
users. This will also result in longer login times as Samba
@ -910,9 +898,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1681"
></A
>9.5.1. Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</H2
NAME="AEN1584"
>9.5.1. Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</A
></H2
><P
>This method involves the additions of the following parameters
in the smb.conf file:</P
@ -946,9 +934,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1689"
></A
>9.5.2. Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</H2
NAME="AEN1592"
>9.5.2. Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</A
></H2
><P
>This method involves additon of the following paramters in the smb.conf file:</P
><P
@ -1009,9 +997,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1706"
></A
>9.5.3. Configure Samba as an authentication server</H2
NAME="AEN1609"
>9.5.3. Configure Samba as an authentication server</A
></H2
><P
>This mode of authentication demands that there be on the
Unix/Linux system both a Unix style account as well as an
@ -1046,9 +1034,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1713"
></A
>9.5.3.1. Users</H3
NAME="AEN1616"
>9.5.3.1. Users</A
></H3
><P
>A user account that may provide a home directory should be
created. The following Linux system commands are typical of
@ -1058,10 +1046,10 @@ the procedure for creating an account.</P
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
> # useradd -s /bin/bash -d /home/"userid" -m "userid"
# passwd "userid"
Enter Password: &lt;pw&gt;
Enter Password: &#60;pw&#62;
# smbpasswd -a "userid"
Enter Password: &lt;pw&gt;</PRE
Enter Password: &#60;pw&#62;</PRE
></P
></DIV
><DIV
@ -1069,9 +1057,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1718"
></A
>9.5.3.2. MS Windows NT Machine Accounts</H3
NAME="AEN1621"
>9.5.3.2. MS Windows NT Machine Accounts</A
></H3
><P
>These are required only when Samba is used as a domain
controller. Refer to the Samba-PDC-HOWTO for more details.</P
@ -1090,9 +1078,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1723"
></A
>9.6. Conclusions</H1
NAME="AEN1626"
>9.6. Conclusions</A
></H1
><P
>Samba provides a flexible means to operate as...</P
><P

152
docs/htmldocs/introduction.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>General installation</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -104,105 +104,61 @@ HREF="install.html"
><DT
>1.1. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN26"
>Read the man pages</A
>Obtaining and installing samba</A
></DT
><DT
>1.2. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN36"
>Building the Binaries</A
></DT
><DT
>1.3. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN64"
>The all important step</A
></DT
><DT
>1.4. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN68"
>Create the smb configuration file.</A
></DT
><DT
>1.5. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN82"
>Test your config file with
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>testparm</B
></A
></DT
><DT
>1.6. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN90"
>Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
HREF="install.html#AEN31"
>Configuring samba</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>1.6.1. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN100"
>Starting from inetd.conf</A
>1.2.1. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN36"
>Editing the smb.conf file</A
></DT
><DT
>1.6.2. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN129"
>Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A
>1.2.2. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN58"
>SWAT</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>1.7. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN145"
>1.3. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN64"
>Try listing the shares available on your
server</A
></DT
><DT
>1.8. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN154"
>1.4. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN73"
>Try connecting with the unix client</A
></DT
><DT
>1.9. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN170"
>1.5. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN89"
>Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN184"
>1.6. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN103"
>What If Things Don't Work?</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>1.10.1. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN189"
>Diagnosing Problems</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10.2. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN193"
>1.6.1. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN108"
>Scope IDs</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10.3. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN196"
>Choosing the Protocol Level</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10.4. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN205"
>Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10.5. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN210"
>1.6.2. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN111"
>Locking</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10.6. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN219"
>Mapping Usernames</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
@ -216,32 +172,32 @@ HREF="browsing-quick.html"
><DL
><DT
>2.1. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN230"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN130"
>Discussion</A
></DT
><DT
>2.2. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN238"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN139"
>Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</A
></DT
><DT
>2.3. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN252"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN153"
>Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</A
></DT
><DT
>2.4. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN257"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN158"
>Use of WINS</A
></DT
><DT
>2.5. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN268"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN169"
>Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</A
></DT
><DT
>2.6. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN274"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN177"
>Name Resolution Order</A
></DT
></DL
@ -255,146 +211,146 @@ HREF="passdb.html"
><DL
><DT
>3.1. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN324"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN227"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>3.2. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN331"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN234"
>Important Notes About Security</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>3.2.1. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN346"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN249"
>Advantages of SMB Encryption</A
></DT
><DT
>3.2.2. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN351"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN254"
>Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>3.3. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN357"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN260"
>The smbpasswd Command</A
></DT
><DT
>3.4. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN388"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN291"
>Plain text</A
></DT
><DT
>3.5. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN393"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN296"
>TDB</A
></DT
><DT
>3.6. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN396"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN299"
>LDAP</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>3.6.1. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN398"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN301"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>3.6.2. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN418"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN321"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>3.6.3. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN447"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN350"
>Supported LDAP Servers</A
></DT
><DT
>3.6.4. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN452"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN355"
>Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</A
></DT
><DT
>3.6.5. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN464"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN367"
>Configuring Samba with LDAP</A
></DT
><DT
>3.6.6. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN511"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN414"
>Accounts and Groups management</A
></DT
><DT
>3.6.7. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN516"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN419"
>Security and sambaAccount</A
></DT
><DT
>3.6.8. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN536"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN439"
>LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</A
></DT
><DT
>3.6.9. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN606"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN509"
>Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>3.7. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN614"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN517"
>MySQL</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>3.7.1. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN616"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN519"
>Building</A
></DT
><DT
>3.7.2. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN622"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN525"
>Creating the database</A
></DT
><DT
>3.7.3. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN632"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN535"
>Configuring</A
></DT
><DT
>3.7.4. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN649"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN552"
>Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</A
></DT
><DT
>3.7.5. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN654"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN557"
>Getting non-column data from the table</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>3.8. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN662"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN565"
>Passdb XML plugin</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>3.8.1. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN664"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN567"
>Building</A
></DT
><DT
>3.8.2. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN670"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN573"
>Usage</A
></DT
></DL

2
docs/htmldocs/lmhosts.5.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>lmhosts</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"

84
docs/htmldocs/msdfs.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -81,9 +81,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1993"
></A
>12.1. Instructions</H1
NAME="AEN1896"
>12.1. Instructions</A
></H1
><P
>The Distributed File System (or Dfs) provides a means of
separating the logical view of files and directories that users
@ -99,21 +99,17 @@ TARGET="_top"
machine (for Dfs-aware clients to browse) using Samba.</P
><P
>To enable SMB-based DFS for Samba, configure it with the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>--with-msdfs</I
></TT
>--with-msdfs</VAR
> option. Once built, a
Samba server can be made a Dfs server by setting the global
boolean <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#HOSTMSDFS"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
> host msdfs</I
></TT
> host msdfs</VAR
></A
> parameter in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
@ -123,18 +119,16 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
level boolean <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#MSDFSROOT"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
> msdfs root</I
></TT
> msdfs root</VAR
></A
> parameter. A Dfs root directory on
Samba hosts Dfs links in the form of symbolic links that point
to other servers. For example, a symbolic link
<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>junction-&gt;msdfs:storage1\share1</TT
>junction-&#62;msdfs:storage1\share1</TT
> in
the share directory acts as the Dfs junction. When Dfs-aware
clients attempt to access the junction link, they are redirected
@ -162,54 +156,44 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>In the /export/dfsroot directory we set up our dfs links to
other servers on the network.</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>cd /export/dfsroot</B
></TT
>cd /export/dfsroot</KBD
></P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>chown root /export/dfsroot</B
></TT
>chown root /export/dfsroot</KBD
></P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>chmod 755 /export/dfsroot</B
></TT
>chmod 755 /export/dfsroot</KBD
></P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>ln -s msdfs:storageA\\shareA linka</B
></TT
>ln -s msdfs:storageA\\shareA linka</KBD
></P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
><TT
>root# </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>ln -s msdfs:serverB\\share,serverC\\share linkb</B
></TT
>ln -s msdfs:serverB\\share,serverC\\share linkb</KBD
></P
><P
>You should set up the permissions and ownership of
@ -229,9 +213,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2028"
></A
>12.1.1. Notes</H2
NAME="AEN1931"
>12.1.1. Notes</A
></H2
><P
></P
><UL

18
docs/htmldocs/net.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>net</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>net</B
> {&lt;ads|rap|rpc&gt;} [-h] [-w workgroup] [-W myworkgroup] [-U user] [-I ip-address] [-p port] [-n myname] [-s conffile] [-S server] [-C comment] [-M maxusers] [-F flags] [-j jobid] [-l] [-r] [-f] [-t timeout] [-P] [-D debuglevel]</P
> {&#60;ads|rap|rpc&#62;} [-h] [-w workgroup] [-W myworkgroup] [-U user] [-I ip-address] [-p port] [-n myname] [-s conffile] [-S server] [-C comment] [-M maxusers] [-F flags] [-j jobid] [-l] [-r] [-f] [-t timeout] [-P] [-D debuglevel]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -317,21 +317,21 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
</P
></DD
><DT
>USER DELETE &lt;name&gt; [misc options]</DT
>USER DELETE &#60;name&#62; [misc options]</DT
><DD
><P
> delete specified user
</P
></DD
><DT
>USER INFO &lt;name&gt; [misc options]</DT
>USER INFO &#60;name&#62; [misc options]</DT
><DD
><P
> list the domain groups of the specified user
</P
></DD
><DT
>USER ADD &lt;name&gt; [password] [-F user flags] [misc. options]</DT
>USER ADD &#60;name&#62; [password] [-F user flags] [misc. options]</DT
><DD
><P
> Add specified user
@ -345,14 +345,14 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
</P
></DD
><DT
>GROUP DELETE &lt;name&gt; [misc. options] [targets]</DT
>GROUP DELETE &#60;name&#62; [misc. options] [targets]</DT
><DD
><P
> Delete specified group
</P
></DD
><DT
>GROUP ADD &lt;name&gt; [-C comment]</DT
>GROUP ADD &#60;name&#62; [-C comment]</DT
><DD
><P
> Create specified group
@ -366,14 +366,14 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
</P
></DD
><DT
>SHARE ADD &lt;name=serverpath&gt; [misc. options] [targets]</DT
>SHARE ADD &#60;name=serverpath&#62; [misc. options] [targets]</DT
><DD
><P
> Adds a share from a server (makes the export active)
</P
></DD
><DT
>SHARE DELETE &lt;sharenam</DT
>SHARE DELETE &#60;sharenam</DT
><DD
><P
></P

46
docs/htmldocs/nmbd.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>nmbd</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> [-D] [-F] [-S] [-a] [-i] [-o] [-h] [-V] [-d &lt;debug level&gt;] [-H &lt;lmhosts file&gt;] [-l &lt;log directory&gt;] [-n &lt;primary netbios name&gt;] [-p &lt;port number&gt;] [-s &lt;configuration file&gt;]</P
> [-D] [-F] [-S] [-a] [-i] [-o] [-h] [-V] [-d &#60;debug level&#62;] [-H &#60;lmhosts file&#62;] [-l &#60;log directory&#62;] [-n &#60;primary netbios name&#62;] [-p &#60;port number&#62;] [-s &#60;configuration file&#62;]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -215,9 +215,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmbd</B
> also logs to standard
output, as if the <TT
output, as if the <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>-S</TT
>-S</CODE
> parameter had been
given. </P
></DD
@ -244,7 +244,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>.</P
></DD
><DT
>-H &lt;filename&gt;</DT
>-H &#60;filename&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>NetBIOS lmhosts file. The lmhosts
@ -253,12 +253,10 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
resolution mechanism <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#nameresolveorder"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name resolve
order</I
></TT
order</VAR
></A
> described in <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
@ -320,7 +318,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>.</P
></DD
><DT
>-d &lt;debug level&gt;</DT
>-d &#60;debug level&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>debuglevel is an integer
@ -344,11 +342,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>log level</I
></TT
>log level</VAR
></A
>
parameter in the <SPAN
@ -360,7 +356,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
> file.</P
></DD
><DT
>-l &lt;log directory&gt;</DT
>-l &#60;log directory&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>The -l parameter specifies a directory
@ -395,7 +391,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
</P
></DD
><DT
>-n &lt;primary NetBIOS name&gt;</DT
>-n &#60;primary NetBIOS name&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>This option allows you to override
@ -403,12 +399,10 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
to setting the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#netbiosname"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>NetBIOS
name</I
></TT
name</VAR
></A
> parameter in the <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
@ -427,7 +421,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>.</P
></DD
><DT
>-p &lt;UDP port number&gt;</DT
>-p &#60;UDP port number&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>UDP port number is a positive integer value.
@ -440,7 +434,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
won't need help!</P
></DD
><DT
>-s &lt;configuration file&gt;</DT
>-s &#60;configuration file&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>The default configuration file name
@ -565,9 +559,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
<A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WINSSUPPORT"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>wins support</TT
>wins support</CODE
></A
>
parameter in the <SPAN
@ -603,9 +597,9 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
> (see the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOCALMASTER"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>local master</TT
>local master</CODE
></A
>
parameter in the <SPAN

66
docs/htmldocs/nmblookup.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>nmblookup</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>nmblookup</B
> [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B &lt;broadcast address&gt;] [-U &lt;unicast address&gt;] [-d &lt;debug level&gt;] [-s &lt;smb config file&gt;] [-i &lt;NetBIOS scope&gt;] [-T] [-f] {name}</P
> [-M] [-R] [-S] [-r] [-A] [-h] [-B &#60;broadcast address&#62;] [-U &#60;unicast address&#62;] [-d &#60;debug level&#62;] [-s &#60;smb config file&#62;] [-i &#60;NetBIOS scope&#62;] [-T] [-f] {name}</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -82,24 +82,20 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
><DD
><P
>Searches for a master browser by looking
up the NetBIOS name <TT
up the NetBIOS name <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>name</I
></TT
>name</VAR
> with a
type of <TT
type of <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>0x1d</TT
>. If <TT
>0x1d</CODE
>. If <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
> name</I
></TT
> name</VAR
> is "-" then it does a lookup on the special name
<TT
<CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>__MSBROWSE__</TT
>__MSBROWSE__</CODE
>.</P
></DD
><DT
@ -145,11 +141,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>-A</DT
><DD
><P
>Interpret <TT
>Interpret <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>name</I
></TT
>name</VAR
> as
an IP Address and do a node status query on this address.</P
></DD
@ -160,7 +154,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
>Print a help (usage) message.</P
></DD
><DT
>-B &lt;broadcast address&gt;</DT
>-B &#60;broadcast address&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>Send the query to the given broadcast address. Without
@ -169,11 +163,9 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
either auto-detected or defined in the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#INTERFACES"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>interfaces</I
></TT
>interfaces</VAR
>
</A
> parameter of the <SPAN
@ -186,26 +178,22 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
</P
></DD
><DT
>-U &lt;unicast address&gt;</DT
>-U &#60;unicast address&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>Do a unicast query to the specified address or
host <TT
host <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>unicast address</I
></TT
>unicast address</VAR
>. This option
(along with the <TT
(along with the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-R</I
></TT
>-R</VAR
> option) is needed to
query a WINS server.</P
></DD
><DT
>-d &lt;debuglevel&gt;</DT
>-d &#60;debuglevel&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>debuglevel is an integer from 0 to 10.</P
@ -229,11 +217,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LOGLEVEL"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
> log level</I
></TT
> log level</VAR
></A
> parameter in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
@ -241,7 +227,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
> file.</P
></DD
><DT
>-s &lt;smb.conf&gt;</DT
>-s &#60;smb.conf&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>This parameter specifies the pathname to
@ -253,7 +239,7 @@ TARGET="_top"
the Samba setup on the machine.</P
></DD
><DT
>-i &lt;scope&gt;</DT
>-i &#60;scope&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>This specifies a NetBIOS scope that
@ -307,7 +293,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
>This is the NetBIOS name being queried. Depending
upon the previous options this may be a NetBIOS name or IP address.
If a NetBIOS name then the different name types may be specified
by appending '#&lt;type&gt;' to the name. This name may also be
by appending '#&#60;type&#62;' to the name. This name may also be
'*', which will return all registered names within a broadcast
area.</P
></DD

208
docs/htmldocs/oplocks.html
View File

@ -1,208 +0,0 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Oplocks</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="General installation"
HREF="introduction.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Improved browsing in samba"
HREF="improved-browsing.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide"
HREF="browsing-quick.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="browsing-quick.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="CHAPTER"
><H1
><A
NAME="OPLOCKS"
></A
>Chapter 3. Oplocks</H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN378"
></A
>3.1. What are oplocks?</H1
><P
>When a client opens a file it can request an "oplock" or file
lease. This is (to simplify a bit) a guarentee that no one else
has the file open simultaneously. It allows the client to not
send any updates on the file to the server, thus reducing a
network file access to local access (once the file is in
client cache). An "oplock break" is when the server sends
a request to the client to flush all its changes back to
the server, so the file is in a consistent state for other
opens to succeed. If a client fails to respond to this
asynchronous request then the file can be corrupted. Hence
the "turn off oplocks" answer if people are having multi-user
file access problems.</P
><P
>Unless the kernel is "oplock aware" (SGI IRIX and Linux are
the only two UNIXes that are at the moment) then if a local
UNIX process accesses the file simultaneously then Samba
has no way of telling this is occuring, so the guarentee
to the client is broken. This can corrupt the file. Short
answer - it you have UNIX clients accessing the same file
as smbd locally or via NFS and you're not running Linux or
IRIX then turn off oplocks for that file or share.</P
><P
>"Share modes". These are modes of opening a file, that
guarentee an invarient - such as DENY_WRITE - which means
that if any other opens are requested with write access after
this current open has succeeded then they should be denied
with a "sharing violation" error message. Samba handles these
internally inside smbd. UNIX clients accessing the same file
ignore these invarients. Just proving that if you need simultaneous
file access from a Windows and UNIX client you *must* have an
application that is written to lock records correctly on both
sides. Few applications are written like this, and even fewer
are cross platform (UNIX and Windows) so in practice this isn't
much of a problem.</P
><P
>"Locking". This really means "byte range locking" - such as
lock 10 bytes at file offset 24 for write access. This is the
area in which well written UNIX and Windows apps will cooperate.
Windows locks (at least from NT or above) are 64-bit unsigned
offsets. UNIX locks are either 31 bit or 63 bit and are signed
(the top bit is used for the sign). Samba handles these by
first ensuring that all the Windows locks don't conflict (ie.
if other Windows clients have competing locks then just reject
immediately) - this allows us to support 64-bit Windows locks
on 32-bit filesystems. Secondly any locks that are valid are
then mapped onto UNIX fcntl byte range locks. These are the
locks that will be seen by UNIX processes. If there is a conflict
here the lock is rejected.</P
><P
>Note that if a client has an oplock then it "knows" that no
other client can have the file open so usually doesn't bother
to send to lock request to the server - this means once again
if you need to share files between UNIX and Windows processes
either use IRIX or Linux, or turn off oplocks for these
files/shares.</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="H"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="browsing-quick.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Improved browsing in samba</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="introduction.html"
ACCESSKEY="U"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

332
docs/htmldocs/optional.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Optional configuration</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ CLASS="TITLE"
><DIV
CLASS="PARTINTRO"
><A
NAME="AEN1499"
NAME="AEN1402"
></A
><H1
>Introduction</H1
@ -102,19 +102,19 @@ HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
><DL
><DT
>9.1. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1513"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1416"
>Agenda</A
></DT
><DT
>9.2. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1535"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1438"
>Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>9.2.1. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1551"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1454"
><TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/hosts</TT
@ -122,7 +122,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
></DT
><DT
>9.2.2. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1567"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1470"
><TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/resolv.conf</TT
@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
></DT
><DT
>9.2.3. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1578"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1481"
><TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/host.conf</TT
@ -138,7 +138,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
></DT
><DT
>9.2.4. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1586"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1489"
><TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT
@ -148,47 +148,47 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
></DD
><DT
>9.3. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1598"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1501"
>Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>9.3.1. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1610"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1513"
>The NetBIOS Name Cache</A
></DT
><DT
>9.3.2. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1615"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1518"
>The LMHOSTS file</A
></DT
><DT
>9.3.3. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1623"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1526"
>HOSTS file</A
></DT
><DT
>9.3.4. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1628"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1531"
>DNS Lookup</A
></DT
><DT
>9.3.5. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1631"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1534"
>WINS Lookup</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>9.4. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1643"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1546"
>How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and
dependable browsing using Samba</A
></DT
><DT
>9.5. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1653"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1556"
>MS Windows security options and how to configure
Samba for seemless integration</A
></DT
@ -196,24 +196,24 @@ Samba for seemless integration</A
><DL
><DT
>9.5.1. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1681"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1584"
>Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</A
></DT
><DT
>9.5.2. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1689"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1592"
>Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</A
></DT
><DT
>9.5.3. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1706"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1609"
>Configure Samba as an authentication server</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>9.6. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1723"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1626"
>Conclusions</A
></DT
></DL
@ -227,53 +227,53 @@ HREF="unix-permissions.html"
><DL
><DT
>10.1. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1744"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1647"
>Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
security dialogs</A
></DT
><DT
>10.2. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1748"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1651"
>How to view file security on a Samba share</A
></DT
><DT
>10.3. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1759"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1662"
>Viewing file ownership</A
></DT
><DT
>10.4. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1779"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1682"
>Viewing file or directory permissions</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>10.4.1. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1794"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1697"
>File Permissions</A
></DT
><DT
>10.4.2. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1808"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1711"
>Directory Permissions</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>10.5. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1815"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1718"
>Modifying file or directory permissions</A
></DT
><DT
>10.6. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1837"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1740"
>Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
parameters</A
></DT
><DT
>10.7. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1901"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1804"
>Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
mapping</A
></DT
@ -289,17 +289,17 @@ managed authentication</A
><DL
><DT
>11.1. <A
HREF="pam.html#AEN1922"
HREF="pam.html#AEN1825"
>Samba and PAM</A
></DT
><DT
>11.2. <A
HREF="pam.html#AEN1966"
HREF="pam.html#AEN1869"
>Distributed Authentication</A
></DT
><DT
>11.3. <A
HREF="pam.html#AEN1973"
HREF="pam.html#AEN1876"
>PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A
></DT
></DL
@ -313,14 +313,14 @@ HREF="msdfs.html"
><DL
><DT
>12.1. <A
HREF="msdfs.html#AEN1993"
HREF="msdfs.html#AEN1896"
>Instructions</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>12.1.1. <A
HREF="msdfs.html#AEN2028"
HREF="msdfs.html#AEN1931"
>Notes</A
></DT
></DL
@ -336,122 +336,122 @@ HREF="printing.html"
><DL
><DT
>13.1. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2054"
HREF="printing.html#AEN1957"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>13.2. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2076"
HREF="printing.html#AEN1979"
>Configuration</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>13.2.1. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2084"
HREF="printing.html#AEN1987"
>Creating [print$]</A
></DT
><DT
>13.2.2. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2119"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2022"
>Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</A
></DT
><DT
>13.2.3. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2135"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2038"
>Support a large number of printers</A
></DT
><DT
>13.2.4. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2146"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2049"
>Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</A
></DT
><DT
>13.2.5. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2176"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2079"
>Samba and Printer Ports</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>13.3. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2184"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2087"
>The Imprints Toolset</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>13.3.1. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2188"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2091"
>What is Imprints?</A
></DT
><DT
>13.3.2. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2198"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2101"
>Creating Printer Driver Packages</A
></DT
><DT
>13.3.3. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2201"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2104"
>The Imprints server</A
></DT
><DT
>13.3.4. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2205"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2108"
>The Installation Client</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>13.4. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2227"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2130"
>Diagnosis</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>13.4.1. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2229"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2132"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>13.4.2. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2245"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2148"
>Debugging printer problems</A
></DT
><DT
>13.4.3. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2254"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2157"
>What printers do I have?</A
></DT
><DT
>13.4.4. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2262"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2165"
>Setting up printcap and print servers</A
></DT
><DT
>13.4.5. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2290"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2193"
>Job sent, no output</A
></DT
><DT
>13.4.6. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2301"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2204"
>Job sent, strange output</A
></DT
><DT
>13.4.7. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2313"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2216"
>Raw PostScript printed</A
></DT
><DT
>13.4.8. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2316"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2219"
>Advanced Printing</A
></DT
><DT
>13.4.9. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2319"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2222"
>Real debugging</A
></DT
></DL
@ -467,99 +467,99 @@ HREF="winbind.html"
><DL
><DT
>14.1. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2360"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2263"
>Abstract</A
></DT
><DT
>14.2. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2364"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2267"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>14.3. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2377"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2280"
>What Winbind Provides</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>14.3.1. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2384"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2287"
>Target Uses</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>14.4. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2388"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2291"
>How Winbind Works</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>14.4.1. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2393"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2296"
>Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.2. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2397"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2300"
>Microsoft Active Directory Services</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.3. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2400"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2303"
>Name Service Switch</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.4. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2416"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2319"
>Pluggable Authentication Modules</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.5. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2424"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2327"
>User and Group ID Allocation</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.6. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2428"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2331"
>Result Caching</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>14.5. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2431"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2334"
>Installation and Configuration</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>14.5.1. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2438"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2341"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>14.5.2. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2451"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2354"
>Requirements</A
></DT
><DT
>14.5.3. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2465"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2368"
>Testing Things Out</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>14.6. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2680"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2583"
>Limitations</A
></DT
><DT
>14.7. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2690"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2593"
>Conclusion</A
></DT
></DL
@ -573,66 +573,66 @@ HREF="improved-browsing.html"
><DL
><DT
>15.1. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2700"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2603"
>Overview of browsing</A
></DT
><DT
>15.2. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2704"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2608"
>Browsing support in samba</A
></DT
><DT
>15.3. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2713"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2616"
>Problem resolution</A
></DT
><DT
>15.4. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2720"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2625"
>Browsing across subnets</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>15.4.1. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2725"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2630"
>How does cross subnet browsing work ?</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>15.5. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2760"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2665"
>Setting up a WINS server</A
></DT
><DT
>15.6. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2779"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2684"
>Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</A
></DT
><DT
>15.7. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2797"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2702"
>Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</A
></DT
><DT
>15.8. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2807"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2712"
>Forcing samba to be the master</A
></DT
><DT
>15.9. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2816"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2721"
>Making samba the domain master</A
></DT
><DT
>15.10. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2834"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2739"
>Note about broadcast addresses</A
></DT
><DT
>15.11. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2837"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2742"
>Multiple interfaces</A
></DT
></DL
@ -646,48 +646,48 @@ HREF="vfs.html"
><DL
><DT
>16.1. <A
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2855"
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2760"
>Introduction and configuration</A
></DT
><DT
>16.2. <A
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2864"
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2769"
>Included modules</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>16.2.1. <A
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2866"
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2771"
>audit</A
></DT
><DT
>16.2.2. <A
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2874"
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2779"
>recycle</A
></DT
><DT
>16.2.3. <A
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2911"
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2816"
>netatalk</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>16.3. <A
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2918"
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2823"
>VFS modules available elsewhere</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>16.3.1. <A
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2922"
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2827"
>DatabaseFS</A
></DT
><DT
>16.3.2. <A
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2930"
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2835"
>vscan</A
></DT
></DL
@ -696,149 +696,155 @@ HREF="vfs.html#AEN2930"
></DD
><DT
>17. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html"
>Access Samba source code via CVS</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>17.1. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2942"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>17.2. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2947"
>CVS Access to samba.org</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>17.2.1. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2950"
>Access via CVSweb</A
></DT
><DT
>17.2.2. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2955"
>Access via cvs</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DD
><DT
>18. <A
HREF="groupmapping.html"
>Group mapping HOWTO</A
></DT
><DT
>19. <A
>18. <A
HREF="speed.html"
>Samba performance issues</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>19.1. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3033"
>18.1. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2890"
>Comparisons</A
></DT
><DT
>19.2. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3039"
>18.2. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2896"
>Socket options</A
></DT
><DT
>19.3. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3046"
>18.3. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2903"
>Read size</A
></DT
><DT
>19.4. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3051"
>18.4. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2908"
>Max xmit</A
></DT
><DT
>19.5. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3056"
>18.5. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2913"
>Log level</A
></DT
><DT
>19.6. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3059"
>18.6. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2916"
>Read raw</A
></DT
><DT
>19.7. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3064"
>18.7. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2921"
>Write raw</A
></DT
><DT
>19.8. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3068"
>18.8. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2925"
>Slow Clients</A
></DT
><DT
>19.9. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3072"
>18.9. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2929"
>Slow Logins</A
></DT
><DT
>19.10. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3075"
>18.10. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2932"
>Client tuning</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>20. <A
>19. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html"
>Creating Group Profiles</A
>Creating Group Prolicy Files</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>20.1. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3123"
>19.1. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN2980"
>Windows '9x</A
></DT
><DT
>20.2. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3132"
>19.2. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN2990"
>Windows NT 4</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>20.2.1. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3155"
>19.2.1. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3013"
>Side bar Notes</A
></DT
><DT
>20.2.2. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3159"
>19.2.2. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3017"
>Mandatory profiles</A
></DT
><DT
>20.2.3. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3162"
>19.2.3. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3020"
>moveuser.exe</A
></DT
><DT
>20.2.4. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3165"
>19.2.4. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3023"
>Get SID</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>20.3. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3170"
>19.3. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3028"
>Windows 2000/XP</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>20. <A
HREF="securing-samba.html"
>Securing Samba</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>20.1. <A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3109"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>20.2. <A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3112"
>Using host based protection</A
></DT
><DT
>20.3. <A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3119"
>Using interface protection</A
></DT
><DT
>20.4. <A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3128"
>Using a firewall</A
></DT
><DT
>20.5. <A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3135"
>Using a IPC$ share deny</A
></DT
><DT
>20.6. <A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3144"
>Upgrading Samba</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DIV
></DIV

117
docs/htmldocs/other-clients.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Samba and other CIFS clients</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -16,8 +16,8 @@ REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Portability"
HREF="portability.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Reporting Bugs"
HREF="bugreport.html"></HEAD
TITLE="How to compile SAMBA"
HREF="compiling.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="bugreport.html"
HREF="compiling.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
@ -82,9 +82,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3311"
></A
>22.1. Macintosh clients?</H1
NAME="AEN3221"
>22.1. Macintosh clients?</A
></H1
><P
>Yes. <A
HREF="http://www.thursby.com/"
@ -128,18 +128,18 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3320"
></A
>22.2. OS2 Client</H1
NAME="AEN3230"
>22.2. OS2 Client</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3322"
></A
NAME="AEN3232"
>22.2.1. How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or
OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</H2
OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</A
></H2
><P
>A more complete answer to this question can be
found on <A
@ -195,10 +195,10 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3337"
></A
NAME="AEN3247"
>22.2.2. How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect),
OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</H2
OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</A
></H2
><P
>You can use the free Microsoft LAN Manager 2.2c Client
for OS/2 from
@ -239,10 +239,10 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3346"
></A
NAME="AEN3256"
>22.2.3. Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version)
is used as a client?</H2
is used as a client?</A
></H2
><P
>When you do a NET VIEW or use the "File and Print
Client Resource Browser", no Samba servers show up. This can
@ -261,10 +261,10 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3350"
></A
NAME="AEN3260"
>22.2.4. How do I get printer driver download working
for OS/2 clients?</H2
for OS/2 clients?</A
></H2
><P
>First, create a share called [PRINTDRV] that is
world-readable. Copy your OS/2 driver files there. Note
@ -274,17 +274,13 @@ NAME="AEN3350"
><P
>Install the NT driver first for that printer. Then,
add to your smb.conf a parameter, os2 driver map =
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>filename</I
></TT
>filename</VAR
>". Then, in the file
specified by <TT
specified by <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>filename</I
></TT
>filename</VAR
>, map the
name of the NT driver name to the OS/2 driver name as
follows:</P
@ -312,17 +308,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3360"
></A
>22.3. Windows for Workgroups</H1
NAME="AEN3270"
>22.3. Windows for Workgroups</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3362"
></A
>22.3.1. Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</H2
NAME="AEN3272"
>22.3.1. Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</A
></H2
><P
>Use the latest TCP/IP stack from microsoft if you use Windows
for workgroups.</P
@ -342,9 +338,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3367"
></A
>22.3.2. Delete .pwl files after password change</H2
NAME="AEN3277"
>22.3.2. Delete .pwl files after password change</A
></H2
><P
>WfWg does a lousy job with passwords. I find that if I change my
password on either the unix box or the PC the safest thing to do is to
@ -362,9 +358,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3372"
></A
>22.3.3. Configure WfW password handling</H2
NAME="AEN3282"
>22.3.3. Configure WfW password handling</A
></H2
><P
>There is a program call admincfg.exe
on the last disk (disk 8) of the WFW 3.11 disk set. To install it
@ -381,9 +377,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3376"
></A
>22.3.4. Case handling of passwords</H2
NAME="AEN3286"
>22.3.4. Case handling of passwords</A
></H2
><P
>Windows for Workgroups uppercases the password before sending it to the server. Unix passwords can be case-sensitive though. Check the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html"
@ -394,15 +390,30 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>password level</B
> to specify what characters samba should try to uppercase when checking.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3291"
>22.3.5. Use TCP/IP as default protocol</A
></H2
><P
>To support print queue reporting you may find
that you have to use TCP/IP as the default protocol under
WfWg. For some reason if you leave Netbeui as the default
it may break the print queue reporting on some systems.
It is presumably a WfWg bug.</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3381"
></A
>22.4. Windows '95/'98</H1
NAME="AEN3294"
>22.4. Windows '95/'98</A
></H1
><P
>When using Windows 95 OEM SR2 the following updates are recommended where Samba
is being used. Please NOTE that the above change will affect you once these
@ -448,9 +459,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3397"
></A
>22.5. Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</H1
NAME="AEN3310"
>22.5. Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A
></H1
><P
>
There are several annoyances with Windows 2000 SP2. One of which
@ -560,7 +571,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="bugreport.html"
HREF="compiling.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
@ -584,7 +595,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Reporting Bugs</TD
>How to compile SAMBA</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV

917
docs/htmldocs/p1346.html
View File

@ -1,917 +0,0 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Optional configuration</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Samba as a NT4 domain member"
HREF="domain-security.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="PART"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="domain-security.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="PART"
><A
NAME="AEN1346"
></A
><DIV
CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
><H1
CLASS="TITLE"
>III. Optional configuration</H1
><DIV
CLASS="PARTINTRO"
><A
NAME="AEN1348"
></A
><H1
>Introduction</H1
><P
>Samba has several features that you might want or might not want to use. The chapters in this
part each cover one specific feature.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="TOC"
><DL
><DT
><B
>Table of Contents</B
></DT
><DT
>10. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>10.1. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1362"
>Agenda</A
></DT
><DT
>10.2. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1384"
>Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>10.2.1. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1400"
><TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/hosts</TT
></A
></DT
><DT
>10.2.2. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1416"
><TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/resolv.conf</TT
></A
></DT
><DT
>10.2.3. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1427"
><TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/host.conf</TT
></A
></DT
><DT
>10.2.4. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1435"
><TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/nsswitch.conf</TT
></A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>10.3. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1447"
>Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>10.3.1. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1459"
>The NetBIOS Name Cache</A
></DT
><DT
>10.3.2. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1464"
>The LMHOSTS file</A
></DT
><DT
>10.3.3. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1472"
>HOSTS file</A
></DT
><DT
>10.3.4. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1477"
>DNS Lookup</A
></DT
><DT
>10.3.5. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1480"
>WINS Lookup</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>10.4. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1492"
>How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and
dependable browsing using Samba</A
></DT
><DT
>10.5. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1502"
>MS Windows security options and how to configure
Samba for seemless integration</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>10.5.1. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1530"
>Use MS Windows NT as an authentication server</A
></DT
><DT
>10.5.2. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1538"
>Make Samba a member of an MS Windows NT security domain</A
></DT
><DT
>10.5.3. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1555"
>Configure Samba as an authentication server</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>10.6. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1572"
>Conclusions</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>11. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html"
>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>11.1. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1593"
>Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
security dialogs</A
></DT
><DT
>11.2. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1602"
>How to view file security on a Samba share</A
></DT
><DT
>11.3. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1613"
>Viewing file ownership</A
></DT
><DT
>11.4. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1633"
>Viewing file or directory permissions</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>11.4.1. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1648"
>File Permissions</A
></DT
><DT
>11.4.2. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1662"
>Directory Permissions</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>11.5. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1669"
>Modifying file or directory permissions</A
></DT
><DT
>11.6. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1691"
>Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
parameters</A
></DT
><DT
>11.7. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1755"
>Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
mapping</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>12. <A
HREF="pam.html"
>Configuring PAM for distributed but centrally
managed authentication</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>12.1. <A
HREF="pam.html#AEN1776"
>Samba and PAM</A
></DT
><DT
>12.2. <A
HREF="pam.html#AEN1820"
>Distributed Authentication</A
></DT
><DT
>12.3. <A
HREF="pam.html#AEN1827"
>PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>13. <A
HREF="msdfs.html"
>Hosting a Microsoft Distributed File System tree on Samba</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>13.1. <A
HREF="msdfs.html#AEN1847"
>Instructions</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>13.1.1. <A
HREF="msdfs.html#AEN1882"
>Notes</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DD
><DT
>14. <A
HREF="printing.html"
>Printing Support</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>14.1. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN1908"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>14.2. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN1930"
>Configuration</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>14.2.1. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN1938"
>Creating [print$]</A
></DT
><DT
>14.2.2. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN1973"
>Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</A
></DT
><DT
>14.2.3. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN1989"
>Support a large number of printers</A
></DT
><DT
>14.2.4. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2000"
>Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</A
></DT
><DT
>14.2.5. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2030"
>Samba and Printer Ports</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>14.3. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2038"
>The Imprints Toolset</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>14.3.1. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2042"
>What is Imprints?</A
></DT
><DT
>14.3.2. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2052"
>Creating Printer Driver Packages</A
></DT
><DT
>14.3.3. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2055"
>The Imprints server</A
></DT
><DT
>14.3.4. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2059"
>The Installation Client</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>14.4. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2081"
>Diagnosis</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>14.4.1. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2083"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.2. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2099"
>Debugging printer problems</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.3. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2108"
>What printers do I have?</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.4. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2116"
>Setting up printcap and print servers</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.5. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2144"
>Job sent, no output</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.6. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2155"
>Job sent, strange output</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.7. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2167"
>Raw PostScript printed</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.8. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2170"
>Advanced Printing</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4.9. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2173"
>Real debugging</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DD
><DT
>15. <A
HREF="securitylevels.html"
>Security levels</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>15.1. <A
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN2186"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>15.2. <A
HREF="securitylevels.html#AEN2197"
>More complete description of security levels</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>16. <A
HREF="winbind.html"
>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>16.1. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2249"
>Abstract</A
></DT
><DT
>16.2. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2253"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>16.3. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2266"
>What Winbind Provides</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>16.3.1. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2273"
>Target Uses</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>16.4. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2277"
>How Winbind Works</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>16.4.1. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2282"
>Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A
></DT
><DT
>16.4.2. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2286"
>Name Service Switch</A
></DT
><DT
>16.4.3. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2302"
>Pluggable Authentication Modules</A
></DT
><DT
>16.4.4. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2310"
>User and Group ID Allocation</A
></DT
><DT
>16.4.5. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2314"
>Result Caching</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>16.5. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2317"
>Installation and Configuration</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>16.5.1. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2324"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>16.5.2. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2337"
>Requirements</A
></DT
><DT
>16.5.3. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2351"
>Testing Things Out</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>16.6. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2566"
>Limitations</A
></DT
><DT
>16.7. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2576"
>Conclusion</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>17. <A
HREF="pdb-mysql.html"
>Passdb MySQL plugin</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>17.1. <A
HREF="pdb-mysql.html#AEN2590"
>Building</A
></DT
><DT
>17.2. <A
HREF="pdb-mysql.html#AEN2596"
>Configuring</A
></DT
><DT
>17.3. <A
HREF="pdb-mysql.html#AEN2611"
>Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</A
></DT
><DT
>17.4. <A
HREF="pdb-mysql.html#AEN2616"
>Getting non-column data from the table</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>18. <A
HREF="pdb-xml.html"
>Passdb XML plugin</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>18.1. <A
HREF="pdb-xml.html#AEN2635"
>Building</A
></DT
><DT
>18.2. <A
HREF="pdb-xml.html#AEN2641"
>Usage</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>19. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html"
>Storing Samba's User/Machine Account information in an LDAP Directory</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>19.1. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2664"
>Purpose</A
></DT
><DT
>19.2. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2684"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>19.3. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2713"
>Supported LDAP Servers</A
></DT
><DT
>19.4. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2718"
>Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</A
></DT
><DT
>19.5. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2730"
>Configuring Samba with LDAP</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>19.5.1. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2732"
>OpenLDAP configuration</A
></DT
><DT
>19.5.2. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2749"
>Configuring Samba</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>19.6. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2777"
>Accounts and Groups management</A
></DT
><DT
>19.7. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2782"
>Security and sambaAccount</A
></DT
><DT
>19.8. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2802"
>LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</A
></DT
><DT
>19.9. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2872"
>Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</A
></DT
><DT
>19.10. <A
HREF="samba-ldap-howto.html#AEN2880"
>Comments</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>20. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html"
>HOWTO Access Samba source code via CVS</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>20.1. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2891"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>20.2. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2896"
>CVS Access to samba.org</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>20.2.1. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2899"
>Access via CVSweb</A
></DT
><DT
>20.2.2. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2904"
>Access via cvs</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DD
><DT
>21. <A
HREF="groupmapping.html"
>Group mapping HOWTO</A
></DT
><DT
>22. <A
HREF="speed.html"
>Samba performance issues</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>22.1. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2982"
>Comparisons</A
></DT
><DT
>22.2. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2988"
>Oplocks</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>22.2.1. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2990"
>Overview</A
></DT
><DT
>22.2.2. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2998"
>Level2 Oplocks</A
></DT
><DT
>22.2.3. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3004"
>Old 'fake oplocks' option - deprecated</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>22.3. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3008"
>Socket options</A
></DT
><DT
>22.4. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3015"
>Read size</A
></DT
><DT
>22.5. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3020"
>Max xmit</A
></DT
><DT
>22.6. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3025"
>Locking</A
></DT
><DT
>22.7. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3029"
>Share modes</A
></DT
><DT
>22.8. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3034"
>Log level</A
></DT
><DT
>22.9. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3037"
>Wide lines</A
></DT
><DT
>22.10. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3040"
>Read raw</A
></DT
><DT
>22.11. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3045"
>Write raw</A
></DT
><DT
>22.12. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3049"
>Read prediction</A
></DT
><DT
>22.13. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3056"
>Memory mapping</A
></DT
><DT
>22.14. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3061"
>Slow Clients</A
></DT
><DT
>22.15. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3065"
>Slow Logins</A
></DT
><DT
>22.16. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3068"
>Client tuning</A
></DT
><DT
>22.17. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3100"
>My Results</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DIV
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="domain-security.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="H"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Samba as a NT4 domain member</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
>&nbsp;</TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Integrating MS Windows networks with Samba</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

438
docs/htmldocs/p18.html
View File

@ -1,438 +0,0 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>General installation</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="How to Install and Test SAMBA"
HREF="install.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="PART"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="install.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="PART"
><A
NAME="AEN18"
></A
><DIV
CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
><H1
CLASS="TITLE"
>I. General installation</H1
><DIV
CLASS="PARTINTRO"
><A
NAME="AEN20"
></A
><H1
>Introduction</H1
><P
>This part contains general info on how to install samba
and how to configure the parts of samba you will most likely need.
PLEASE read this.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="TOC"
><DL
><DT
><B
>Table of Contents</B
></DT
><DT
>1. <A
HREF="install.html"
>How to Install and Test SAMBA</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>1.1. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN25"
>Read the man pages</A
></DT
><DT
>1.2. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN35"
>Building the Binaries</A
></DT
><DT
>1.3. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN63"
>The all important step</A
></DT
><DT
>1.4. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN67"
>Create the smb configuration file.</A
></DT
><DT
>1.5. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN81"
>Test your config file with
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>testparm</B
></A
></DT
><DT
>1.6. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN89"
>Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>1.6.1. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN99"
>Starting from inetd.conf</A
></DT
><DT
>1.6.2. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN128"
>Alternative: starting it as a daemon</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>1.7. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN144"
>Try listing the shares available on your
server</A
></DT
><DT
>1.8. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN153"
>Try connecting with the unix client</A
></DT
><DT
>1.9. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN169"
>Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN183"
>What If Things Don't Work?</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>1.10.1. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN188"
>Diagnosing Problems</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10.2. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN192"
>Scope IDs</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10.3. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN195"
>Choosing the Protocol Level</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10.4. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN204"
>Printing from UNIX to a Client PC</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10.5. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN209"
>Locking</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10.6. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN218"
>Mapping Usernames</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DD
><DT
>2. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html"
>Improved browsing in samba</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>2.1. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN228"
>Overview of browsing</A
></DT
><DT
>2.2. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN232"
>Browsing support in samba</A
></DT
><DT
>2.3. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN241"
>Problem resolution</A
></DT
><DT
>2.4. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN248"
>Browsing across subnets</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>2.4.1. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN253"
>How does cross subnet browsing work ?</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>2.5. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN288"
>Setting up a WINS server</A
></DT
><DT
>2.6. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN307"
>Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</A
></DT
><DT
>2.7. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN325"
>Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</A
></DT
><DT
>2.8. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN335"
>Forcing samba to be the master</A
></DT
><DT
>2.9. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN344"
>Making samba the domain master</A
></DT
><DT
>2.10. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN362"
>Note about broadcast addresses</A
></DT
><DT
>2.11. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN365"
>Multiple interfaces</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>3. <A
HREF="oplocks.html"
>Oplocks</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>3.1. <A
HREF="oplocks.html#AEN377"
>What are oplocks?</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>4. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html"
>Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>4.1. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN392"
>Discussion</A
></DT
><DT
>4.2. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN400"
>Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</A
></DT
><DT
>4.3. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN414"
>Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</A
></DT
><DT
>4.4. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN419"
>Use of WINS</A
></DT
><DT
>4.5. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN430"
>Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</A
></DT
><DT
>4.6. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN436"
>Name Resolution Order</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>5. <A
HREF="pwencrypt.html"
>LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>5.1. <A
HREF="pwencrypt.html#AEN472"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>5.2. <A
HREF="pwencrypt.html#AEN477"
>Important Notes About Security</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>5.2.1. <A
HREF="pwencrypt.html#AEN496"
>Advantages of SMB Encryption</A
></DT
><DT
>5.2.2. <A
HREF="pwencrypt.html#AEN503"
>Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>5.3. <A
HREF="pwencrypt.html#AEN512"
>The smbpasswd Command</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DIV
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="H"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="install.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
>&nbsp;</TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>How to Install and Test SAMBA</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

391
docs/htmldocs/p3106.html
View File

@ -1,391 +0,0 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Appendixes</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Samba performance issues"
HREF="speed.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Portability"
HREF="portability.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="PART"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="speed.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="portability.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="PART"
><A
NAME="AEN3106"
></A
><DIV
CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
><H1
CLASS="TITLE"
>IV. Appendixes</H1
><DIV
CLASS="TOC"
><DL
><DT
><B
>Table of Contents</B
></DT
><DT
>23. <A
HREF="portability.html"
>Portability</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>23.1. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3115"
>HPUX</A
></DT
><DT
>23.2. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3121"
>SCO Unix</A
></DT
><DT
>23.3. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3125"
>DNIX</A
></DT
><DT
>23.4. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3154"
>RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>24. <A
HREF="other-clients.html"
>Samba and other CIFS clients</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>24.1. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3175"
>Macintosh clients?</A
></DT
><DT
>24.2. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3184"
>OS2 Client</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>24.2.1. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3186"
>How can I configure OS/2 Warp Connect or
OS/2 Warp 4 as a client for Samba?</A
></DT
><DT
>24.2.2. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3201"
>How can I configure OS/2 Warp 3 (not Connect),
OS/2 1.2, 1.3 or 2.x for Samba?</A
></DT
><DT
>24.2.3. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3210"
>Are there any other issues when OS/2 (any version)
is used as a client?</A
></DT
><DT
>24.2.4. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3214"
>How do I get printer driver download working
for OS/2 clients?</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>24.3. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3224"
>Windows for Workgroups</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>24.3.1. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3226"
>Use latest TCP/IP stack from Microsoft</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.2. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3231"
>Delete .pwl files after password change</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.3. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3236"
>Configure WfW password handling</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3.4. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3240"
>Case handling of passwords</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>24.4. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3245"
>Windows '95/'98</A
></DT
><DT
>24.5. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3261"
>Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>25. <A
HREF="bugreport.html"
>Reporting Bugs</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>25.1. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3285"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>25.2. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3295"
>General info</A
></DT
><DT
>25.3. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3301"
>Debug levels</A
></DT
><DT
>25.4. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3318"
>Internal errors</A
></DT
><DT
>25.5. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3328"
>Attaching to a running process</A
></DT
><DT
>25.6. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3331"
>Patches</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>26. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html"
>Diagnosing your samba server</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>26.1. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3354"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>26.2. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3359"
>Assumptions</A
></DT
><DT
>26.3. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3369"
>Tests</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>26.3.1. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3371"
>Test 1</A
></DT
><DT
>26.3.2. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3377"
>Test 2</A
></DT
><DT
>26.3.3. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3383"
>Test 3</A
></DT
><DT
>26.3.4. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3398"
>Test 4</A
></DT
><DT
>26.3.5. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3403"
>Test 5</A
></DT
><DT
>26.3.6. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3409"
>Test 6</A
></DT
><DT
>26.3.7. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3417"
>Test 7</A
></DT
><DT
>26.3.8. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3443"
>Test 8</A
></DT
><DT
>26.3.9. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3460"
>Test 9</A
></DT
><DT
>26.3.10. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3468"
>Test 10</A
></DT
><DT
>26.3.11. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3474"
>Test 11</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>26.4. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3479"
>Still having troubles?</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DIV
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="speed.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="H"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="portability.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Samba performance issues</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
>&nbsp;</TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Portability</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

388
docs/htmldocs/p544.html
View File

@ -1,388 +0,0 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Type of installation</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba"
HREF="pwencrypt.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller"
HREF="samba-pdc.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="PART"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="pwencrypt.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="samba-pdc.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="PART"
><A
NAME="AEN544"
></A
><DIV
CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
><H1
CLASS="TITLE"
>II. Type of installation</H1
><DIV
CLASS="PARTINTRO"
><A
NAME="AEN546"
></A
><H1
>Introduction</H1
><P
>This part contains information on using samba in a (NT 4 or ADS) domain.
If you wish to run samba as a domain member or DC, read the appropriate chapter in
this part.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="TOC"
><DL
><DT
><B
>Table of Contents</B
></DT
><DT
>6. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html"
>How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>6.1. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN566"
>Prerequisite Reading</A
></DT
><DT
>6.2. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN572"
>Background</A
></DT
><DT
>6.3. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN611"
>Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A
></DT
><DT
>6.4. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN654"
>Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the
Domain</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>6.4.1. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN673"
>Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A
></DT
><DT
>6.4.2. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN714"
>"On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A
></DT
><DT
>6.4.3. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN723"
>Joining the Client to the Domain</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>6.5. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN738"
>Common Problems and Errors</A
></DT
><DT
>6.6. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN786"
>System Policies and Profiles</A
></DT
><DT
>6.7. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN830"
>What other help can I get?</A
></DT
><DT
>6.8. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN944"
>Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>6.8.1. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN970"
>Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A
></DT
><DT
>6.8.2. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN989"
>Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>6.9. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1082"
>DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control &#38; Samba</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>7. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html"
>How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>7.1. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1118"
>Prerequisite Reading</A
></DT
><DT
>7.2. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1122"
>Background</A
></DT
><DT
>7.3. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1130"
>What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>7.3.1. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1133"
>How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</A
></DT
><DT
>7.3.2. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1136"
>When is the PDC needed?</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>7.4. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1139"
>Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller?</A
></DT
><DT
>7.5. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1143"
>How do I set up a Samba BDC?</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>7.5.1. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1160"
>How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DD
><DT
>8. <A
HREF="ads.html"
>Samba as a ADS domain member</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>8.1. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1178"
>Installing the required packages for Debian</A
></DT
><DT
>8.2. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1184"
>Installing the required packages for RedHat</A
></DT
><DT
>8.3. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1193"
>Compile Samba</A
></DT
><DT
>8.4. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1205"
>Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</A
></DT
><DT
>8.5. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1215"
>Create the computer account</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>8.5.1. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1219"
>Possible errors</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>8.6. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1231"
>Test your server setup</A
></DT
><DT
>8.7. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1236"
>Testing with smbclient</A
></DT
><DT
>8.8. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1239"
>Notes</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>9. <A
HREF="domain-security.html"
>Samba as a NT4 domain member</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>9.1. <A
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1261"
>Joining an NT Domain with Samba 2.2</A
></DT
><DT
>9.2. <A
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1325"
>Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A
></DT
><DT
>9.3. <A
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1330"
>Why is this better than security = server?</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
></DL
></DIV
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="pwencrypt.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="H"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-pdc.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
>&nbsp;</TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>How to Configure Samba as a NT4 Primary Domain Controller</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

24
docs/htmldocs/pam.html
View File

@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
managed authentication</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -82,9 +82,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1922"
></A
>11.1. Samba and PAM</H1
NAME="AEN1825"
>11.1. Samba and PAM</A
></H1
><P
>A number of Unix systems (eg: Sun Solaris), as well as the
xxxxBSD family and Linux, now utilize the Pluggable Authentication
@ -296,9 +296,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1966"
></A
>11.2. Distributed Authentication</H1
NAME="AEN1869"
>11.2. Distributed Authentication</A
></H1
><P
>The astute administrator will realize from this that the
combination of <TT
@ -329,9 +329,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1973"
></A
>11.3. PAM Configuration in smb.conf</H1
NAME="AEN1876"
>11.3. PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A
></H1
><P
>There is an option in smb.conf called <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#OBEYPAMRESTRICTIONS"
@ -341,9 +341,9 @@ TARGET="_top"
The following is from the on-line help for this option in SWAT;</P
><P
>When Samba 2.2 is configure to enable PAM support (i.e.
<TT
<CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>--with-pam</TT
>--with-pam</CODE
>), this parameter will
control whether or not Samba should obey PAM's account
and session management directives. The default behavior

370
docs/htmldocs/passdb.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>User information database</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN324"
></A
>3.1. Introduction</H1
NAME="AEN227"
>3.1. Introduction</A
></H1
><P
>Old windows clients send plain text passwords over the wire.
Samba can check these passwords by crypting them and comparing them
@ -121,9 +121,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN331"
></A
>3.2. Important Notes About Security</H1
NAME="AEN234"
>3.2. Important Notes About Security</A
></H1
><P
>The unix and SMB password encryption techniques seem similar
on the surface. This similarity is, however, only skin deep. The unix
@ -229,9 +229,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN346"
></A
>3.2.1. Advantages of SMB Encryption</H2
NAME="AEN249"
>3.2.1. Advantages of SMB Encryption</A
></H2
><P
></P
><TABLE
@ -263,9 +263,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN351"
></A
>3.2.2. Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</H2
NAME="AEN254"
>3.2.2. Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</A
></H2
><P
></P
><TABLE
@ -299,9 +299,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN357"
></A
>3.3. The smbpasswd Command</H1
NAME="AEN260"
>3.3. The smbpasswd Command</A
></H1
><P
>The smbpasswd utility is a utility similar to the
<B
@ -331,47 +331,39 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
>To run smbpasswd as a normal user just type :</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>$ </TT
><TT
>$ </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>smbpasswd</B
></TT
>smbpasswd</KBD
></P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>Old SMB password: </TT
><TT
>Old SMB password: </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>&lt;type old value here -
or hit return if there was no old password&gt;</B
></TT
>&#60;type old value here -
or hit return if there was no old password&#62;</KBD
></P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>New SMB Password: </TT
><TT
>New SMB Password: </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>&lt;type new value&gt;
</B
></TT
>&#60;type new value&#62;
</KBD
></P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>Repeat New SMB Password: </TT
><TT
>Repeat New SMB Password: </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>&lt;re-type new value
</B
></TT
>&#60;re-type new value
</KBD
></P
><P
>If the old value does not match the current value stored for
@ -411,9 +403,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN388"
></A
>3.4. Plain text</H1
NAME="AEN291"
>3.4. Plain text</A
></H1
><P
>Older versions of samba retrieved user information from the unix user database
and eventually some other fields from the file <TT
@ -431,9 +423,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN393"
></A
>3.5. TDB</H1
NAME="AEN296"
>3.5. TDB</A
></H1
><P
>Samba can also store the user data in a "TDB" (Trivial Database). Using this backend
doesn't require any additional configuration. This backend is recommended for new installations who
@ -444,17 +436,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN396"
></A
>3.6. LDAP</H1
NAME="AEN299"
>3.6. LDAP</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN398"
></A
>3.6.1. Introduction</H2
NAME="AEN301"
>3.6.1. Introduction</A
></H2
><P
>This document describes how to use an LDAP directory for storing Samba user
account information traditionally stored in the smbpasswd(5) file. It is
@ -520,9 +512,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN418"
></A
>3.6.2. Introduction</H2
NAME="AEN321"
>3.6.2. Introduction</A
></H2
><P
>Traditionally, when configuring <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENCRYPTPASSWORDS"
@ -577,35 +569,27 @@ Identified (RID).</P
used by smbd was developed. The API which defines access to user accounts
is commonly referred to as the samdb interface (previously this was called the passdb
API, and is still so named in the CVS trees). In Samba 2.2.3, enabling support
for a samdb backend (e.g. <TT
for a samdb backend (e.g. <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>--with-ldapsam</I
></TT
>--with-ldapsam</VAR
> or
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>--with-tdbsam</I
></TT
>--with-tdbsam</VAR
>) requires compile time support.</P
><P
>When compiling Samba to include the <TT
>When compiling Samba to include the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>--with-ldapsam</I
></TT
>--with-ldapsam</VAR
> autoconf
option, smbd (and associated tools) will store and lookup user accounts in
an LDAP directory. In reality, this is very easy to understand. If you are
comfortable with using an smbpasswd file, simply replace "smbpasswd" with
"LDAP directory" in all the documentation.</P
><P
>There are a few points to stress about what the <TT
>There are a few points to stress about what the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>--with-ldapsam</I
></TT
>--with-ldapsam</VAR
>
does not provide. The LDAP support referred to in the this documentation does not
include:</P
@ -637,9 +621,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN447"
></A
>3.6.3. Supported LDAP Servers</H2
NAME="AEN350"
>3.6.3. Supported LDAP Servers</A
></H2
><P
>The LDAP samdb code in 2.2.3 has been developed and tested using the OpenLDAP
2.0 server and client libraries. The same code should be able to work with
@ -662,9 +646,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN452"
></A
>3.6.4. Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</H2
NAME="AEN355"
>3.6.4. Schema and Relationship to the RFC 2307 posixAccount</A
></H2
><P
>Samba 3.0 includes the necessary schema file for OpenLDAP 2.0 in
<TT
@ -698,9 +682,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/passwd</TT
> entry, so is the sambaAccount object
meant to supplement the UNIX user account information. A sambaAccount is a
<TT
<CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>STRUCTURAL</TT
>STRUCTURAL</CODE
> objectclass so it can be stored individually
in the directory. However, there are several fields (e.g. uid) which overlap
with the posixAccount objectclass outlined in RFC2307. This is by design.</P
@ -719,24 +703,24 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN464"
></A
>3.6.5. Configuring Samba with LDAP</H2
NAME="AEN367"
>3.6.5. Configuring Samba with LDAP</A
></H2
><DIV
CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN466"
></A
>3.6.5.1. OpenLDAP configuration</H3
NAME="AEN369"
>3.6.5.1. OpenLDAP configuration</A
></H3
><P
>To include support for the sambaAccount object in an OpenLDAP directory
server, first copy the samba.schema file to slapd's configuration directory.</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
>root# </SAMP
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>cp samba.schema /etc/openldap/schema/</B
@ -809,15 +793,13 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN483"
></A
>3.6.5.2. Configuring Samba</H3
NAME="AEN386"
>3.6.5.2. Configuring Samba</A
></H3
><P
>The following parameters are available in smb.conf only with <TT
>The following parameters are available in smb.conf only with <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>--with-ldapsam</I
></TT
>--with-ldapsam</VAR
>
was included with compiling Samba.</P
><P
@ -895,11 +877,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
# define the DN to use when binding to the directory servers
# The password for this DN is not stored in smb.conf. Rather it
# must be set by using 'smbpasswd -w <TT
# must be set by using 'smbpasswd -w <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>secretpw</I
></TT
>secretpw</VAR
>' to store the
# passphrase in the secrets.tdb file. If the "ldap admin dn" values
# changes, this password will need to be reset.
@ -920,7 +900,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
ldap suffix = "ou=people,dc=samba,dc=org"
# generally the default ldap search filter is ok
# ldap filter = "(&amp;(uid=%u)(objectclass=sambaAccount))"</PRE
# ldap filter = "(&#38;(uid=%u)(objectclass=sambaAccount))"</PRE
></P
></DIV
></DIV
@ -929,9 +909,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN511"
></A
>3.6.6. Accounts and Groups management</H2
NAME="AEN414"
>3.6.6. Accounts and Groups management</A
></H2
><P
>As users accounts are managed thru the sambaAccount objectclass, you should
modify you existing administration tools to deal with sambaAccount attributes.</P
@ -954,9 +934,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN516"
></A
>3.6.7. Security and sambaAccount</H2
NAME="AEN419"
>3.6.7. Security and sambaAccount</A
></H2
><P
>There are two important points to remember when discussing the security
of sambaAccount entries in the directory.</P
@ -1033,9 +1013,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN536"
></A
>3.6.8. LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</H2
NAME="AEN439"
>3.6.8. LDAP specials attributes for sambaAccounts</A
></H2
><P
>The sambaAccount objectclass is composed of the following attributes:</P
><P
@ -1043,84 +1023,84 @@ NAME="AEN536"
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>lmPassword</TT
>lmPassword</CODE
>: the LANMAN password 16-byte hash stored as a character
representation of a hexidecimal string.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ntPassword</TT
>ntPassword</CODE
>: the NT password hash 16-byte stored as a character
representation of a hexidecimal string.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>pwdLastSet</TT
>pwdLastSet</CODE
>: The integer time in seconds since 1970 when the
<TT
<CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>lmPassword</TT
> and <TT
>lmPassword</CODE
> and <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ntPassword</TT
>ntPassword</CODE
> attributes were last set.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>acctFlags</TT
>acctFlags</CODE
>: string of 11 characters surrounded by square brackets []
representing account flags such as U (user), W(workstation), X(no password expiration), and
D(disabled).</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>logonTime</TT
>logonTime</CODE
>: Integer value currently unused</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>logoffTime</TT
>logoffTime</CODE
>: Integer value currently unused</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>kickoffTime</TT
>kickoffTime</CODE
>: Integer value currently unused</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>pwdCanChange</TT
>pwdCanChange</CODE
>: Integer value currently unused</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>pwdMustChange</TT
>pwdMustChange</CODE
>: Integer value currently unused</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>homeDrive</TT
>homeDrive</CODE
>: specifies the drive letter to which to map the
UNC path specified by homeDirectory. The drive letter must be specified in the form "X:"
where X is the letter of the drive to map. Refer to the "logon drive" parameter in the
@ -1128,9 +1108,9 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>scriptPath</TT
>scriptPath</CODE
>: The scriptPath property specifies the path of
the user's logon script, .CMD, .EXE, or .BAT file. The string can be null. The path
is relative to the netlogon share. Refer to the "logon script" parameter in the
@ -1138,18 +1118,18 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>profilePath</TT
>profilePath</CODE
>: specifies a path to the user's profile.
This value can be a null string, a local absolute path, or a UNC path. Refer to the
"logon path" parameter in the smb.conf(5) man page for more information.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>smbHome</TT
>smbHome</CODE
>: The homeDirectory property specifies the path of
the home directory for the user. The string can be null. If homeDrive is set and specifies
a drive letter, homeDirectory should be a UNC path. The path must be a network
@ -1159,25 +1139,25 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>userWorkstation</TT
>userWorkstation</CODE
>: character string value currently unused.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>rid</TT
>rid</CODE
>: the integer representation of the user's relative identifier
(RID).</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>primaryGroupID</TT
>primaryGroupID</CODE
>: the relative identifier (RID) of the primary group
of the user.</P
></LI
@ -1222,19 +1202,15 @@ its <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
> file. When a user named "becky" logons to the domain,
the <TT
the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon home</I
></TT
>logon home</VAR
> string is expanded to \\TASHTEGO\becky.
If the smbHome attribute exists in the entry "uid=becky,ou=people,dc=samba,dc=org",
this value is used. However, if this attribute does not exist, then the value
of the <TT
of the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>logon home</I
></TT
>logon home</VAR
> parameter is used in its place. Samba
will only write the attribute value to the directory entry is the value is
something other than the default (e.g. \\MOBY\becky).</P
@ -1244,9 +1220,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN606"
></A
>3.6.9. Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</H2
NAME="AEN509"
>3.6.9. Example LDIF Entries for a sambaAccount</A
></H2
><P
>The following is a working LDIF with the inclusion of the posixAccount objectclass:</P
><P
@ -1303,17 +1279,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN614"
></A
>3.7. MySQL</H1
NAME="AEN517"
>3.7. MySQL</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN616"
></A
>3.7.1. Building</H2
NAME="AEN519"
>3.7.1. Building</A
></H2
><P
>To build the plugin, run <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -1332,9 +1308,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN622"
></A
>3.7.2. Creating the database</H2
NAME="AEN525"
>3.7.2. Creating the database</A
></H2
><P
>You either can set up your own table and specify the field names to pdb_mysql (see below
for the column names) or use the default table. The file <TT
@ -1345,26 +1321,18 @@ contains the correct queries to create the required tables. Use the command :
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mysql -u<TT
>mysql -u<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>username</I
></TT
> -h<TT
>username</VAR
> -h<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>hostname</I
></TT
> -p<TT
>hostname</VAR
> -p<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>password</I
></TT
> <TT
>password</VAR
> <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>databasename</I
></TT
>databasename</VAR
> &#60; <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/path/to/samba/examples/pdb/mysql/mysql.dump</TT
@ -1376,9 +1344,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN632"
></A
>3.7.3. Configuring</H2
NAME="AEN535"
>3.7.3. Configuring</A
></H2
><P
>This plugin lacks some good documentation, but here is some short info:</P
><P
@ -1487,9 +1455,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN649"
></A
>3.7.4. Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</H2
NAME="AEN552"
>3.7.4. Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</A
></H2
><P
>I strongly discourage the use of plaintext passwords, however, you can use them:</P
><P
@ -1502,9 +1470,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN654"
></A
>3.7.5. Getting non-column data from the table</H2
NAME="AEN557"
>3.7.5. Getting non-column data from the table</A
></H2
><P
>It is possible to have not all data in the database and making some 'constant'.</P
><P
@ -1528,17 +1496,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN662"
></A
>3.8. Passdb XML plugin</H1
NAME="AEN565"
>3.8. Passdb XML plugin</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN664"
></A
>3.8.1. Building</H2
NAME="AEN567"
>3.8.1. Building</A
></H2
><P
>This module requires libxml2 to be installed.</P
><P
@ -1556,9 +1524,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN670"
></A
>3.8.2. Usage</H2
NAME="AEN573"
>3.8.2. Usage</A
></H2
><P
>The usage of pdb_xml is pretty straightforward. To export data, use:

341
docs/htmldocs/pdb-mysql.html
View File

@ -1,341 +0,0 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Passdb MySQL plugin</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Optional configuration"
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind"
HREF="winbind.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Passdb XML plugin"
HREF="pdb-xml.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="winbind.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="pdb-xml.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="CHAPTER"
><H1
><A
NAME="PDB-MYSQL"
></A
>Chapter 16. Passdb MySQL plugin</H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2562"
></A
>16.1. Building</H1
><P
>To build the plugin, run <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>make bin/pdb_mysql.so</B
>
in the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>source/</TT
> directory of samba distribution. </P
><P
>Next, copy pdb_mysql.so to any location you want. I
strongly recommend installing it in $PREFIX/lib or /usr/lib/samba/</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2568"
></A
>16.2. Creating the database</H1
><P
>You either can set up your own table and specify the field names to pdb_mysql (see below
for the column names) or use the default table. The file <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>examples/pdb/mysql/mysql.dump</TT
>
contains the correct queries to create the required tables. Use the command :
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>mysql -u<TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>username</I
></TT
> -h<TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>hostname</I
></TT
> -p<TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>password</I
></TT
> <TT
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>databasename</I
></TT
> &#60; <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/path/to/samba/examples/pdb/mysql/mysql.dump</TT
></B
>&#13;</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2578"
></A
>16.3. Configuring</H1
><P
>This plugin lacks some good documentation, but here is some short info:</P
><P
>Add a the following to the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>passdb backend</B
> variable in your <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
>:
<PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>passdb backend = [other-plugins] plugin:/location/to/pdb_mysql.so:identifier [other-plugins]</PRE
></P
><P
>The identifier can be any string you like, as long as it doesn't collide with
the identifiers of other plugins or other instances of pdb_mysql. If you
specify multiple pdb_mysql.so entries in 'passdb backend', you also need to
use different identifiers!</P
><P
>Additional options can be given thru the smb.conf file in the [global] section.</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>identifier:mysql host - host name, defaults to 'localhost'
identifier:mysql password
identifier:mysql user - defaults to 'samba'
identifier:mysql database - defaults to 'samba'
identifier:mysql port - defaults to 3306
identifier:table - Name of the table containing users</PRE
></P
><P
><SPAN
CLASS="emphasis"
><I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
>WARNING: since the password for the mysql user is stored in the
smb.conf file, you should make the the smb.conf file
readable only to the user that runs samba. This is considered a security
bug and will be fixed soon.</I
></SPAN
></P
><P
>Names of the columns in this table(I've added column types those columns should have first):</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>identifier:logon time column - int(9)
identifier:logoff time column - int(9)
identifier:kickoff time column - int(9)
identifier:pass last set time column - int(9)
identifier:pass can change time column - int(9)
identifier:pass must change time column - int(9)
identifier:username column - varchar(255) - unix username
identifier:domain column - varchar(255) - NT domain user is part of
identifier:nt username column - varchar(255) - NT username
identifier:fullname column - varchar(255) - Full name of user
identifier:home dir column - varchar(255) - Unix homedir path
identifier:dir drive column - varchar(2) - Directory drive path (eg: 'H:')
identifier:logon script column - varchar(255) - Batch file to run on client side when logging on
identifier:profile path column - varchar(255) - Path of profile
identifier:acct desc column - varchar(255) - Some ASCII NT user data
identifier:workstations column - varchar(255) - Workstations user can logon to (or NULL for all)
identifier:unknown string column - varchar(255) - unknown string
identifier:munged dial column - varchar(255) - ?
identifier:uid column - int(9) - Unix user ID (uid)
identifier:gid column - int(9) - Unix user group (gid)
identifier:user sid column - varchar(255) - NT user SID
identifier:group sid column - varchar(255) - NT group ID
identifier:lanman pass column - varchar(255) - encrypted lanman password
identifier:nt pass column - varchar(255) - encrypted nt passwd
identifier:plain pass column - varchar(255) - plaintext password
identifier:acct control column - int(9) - nt user data
identifier:unknown 3 column - int(9) - unknown
identifier:logon divs column - int(9) - ?
identifier:hours len column - int(9) - ?
identifier:unknown 5 column - int(9) - unknown
identifier:unknown 6 column - int(9) - unknown</PRE
></P
><P
>Eventually, you can put a colon (:) after the name of each column, which
should specify the column to update when updating the table. You can also
specify nothing behind the colon - then the data from the field will not be
updated. </P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2595"
></A
>16.4. Using plaintext passwords or encrypted password</H1
><P
>I strongly discourage the use of plaintext passwords, however, you can use them:</P
><P
>If you would like to use plaintext passwords, set 'identifier:lanman pass column' and 'identifier:nt pass column' to 'NULL' (without the quotes) and 'identifier:plain pass column' to the name of the column containing the plaintext passwords. </P
><P
>If you use encrypted passwords, set the 'identifier:plain pass column' to 'NULL' (without the quotes). This is the default.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2600"
></A
>16.5. Getting non-column data from the table</H1
><P
>It is possible to have not all data in the database and making some 'constant'.</P
><P
>For example, you can set 'identifier:fullname column' to :
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>CONCAT(First_name,' ',Sur_name)</B
></P
><P
>Or, set 'identifier:workstations column' to :
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>NULL</B
></P
><P
>See the MySQL documentation for more language constructs.</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="winbind.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="H"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="pdb-xml.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="optional.html"
ACCESSKEY="U"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Passdb XML plugin</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

189
docs/htmldocs/pdb-xml.html
View File

@ -1,189 +0,0 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Passdb XML plugin</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Optional configuration"
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Passdb MySQL plugin"
HREF="pdb-mysql.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Stackable VFS modules"
HREF="vfs.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="pdb-mysql.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="vfs.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="CHAPTER"
><H1
><A
NAME="PDB-XML"
></A
>Chapter 17. Passdb XML plugin</H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2619"
></A
>17.1. Building</H1
><P
>This module requires libxml2 to be installed.</P
><P
>To build pdb_xml, run: <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>make bin/pdb_xml.so</B
> in
the directory <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>source/</TT
>. </P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2625"
></A
>17.2. Usage</H1
><P
>The usage of pdb_xml is pretty straightforward. To export data, use:
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>pdbedit -e plugin:/usr/lib/samba/pdb_xml.so:filename</B
>
(where filename is the name of the file to put the data in)</P
><P
>To import data, use:
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>pdbedit -i plugin:/usr/lib/samba/pdb_xml.so:filename -e current-pdb</B
>
Where filename is the name to read the data from and current-pdb to put it in.</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="pdb-mysql.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="H"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="vfs.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Passdb MySQL plugin</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="optional.html"
ACCESSKEY="U"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Stackable VFS modules</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

22
docs/htmldocs/pdbedit.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>pdbedit</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -277,11 +277,9 @@ retype new password</PRE
><DD
><P
>This option may only be used in conjunction
with the <TT
with the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-a</I
></TT
>-a</VAR
> option. It will make
pdbedit to add a machine trust account instead of a user
account (-u username will provide the machine name).</P
@ -374,11 +372,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
><P
>Sets an account policy to a specified value.
This option may only be used in conjunction
with the <TT
with the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-P</I
></TT
>-P</VAR
> option.
</P
><P
@ -397,11 +393,9 @@ account policy value for bad lockout attempt is now 3</PRE
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
><DD
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>debuglevel</I
></TT
>debuglevel</VAR
> is an integer
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
not specified is zero.</P
@ -441,7 +435,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>Print a summary of command line options.</P
></DD
><DT
>-s &lt;configuration file&gt;</DT
>-s &#60;configuration file&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>The file specified contains the

47
docs/htmldocs/portability.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Portability</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -84,9 +84,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3251"
></A
>21.1. HPUX</H1
NAME="AEN3156"
>21.1. HPUX</A
></H1
><P
>HP's implementation of supplementary groups is, er, non-standard (for
hysterical reasons). There are two group files, /etc/group and
@ -114,9 +114,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3257"
></A
>21.2. SCO Unix</H1
NAME="AEN3162"
>21.2. SCO Unix</A
></H1
><P
>
If you run an old version of SCO Unix then you may need to get important
@ -131,9 +131,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3261"
></A
>21.3. DNIX</H1
NAME="AEN3166"
>21.3. DNIX</A
></H1
><P
>DNIX has a problem with seteuid() and setegid(). These routines are
needed for Samba to work correctly, but they were left out of the DNIX
@ -238,9 +238,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3290"
></A
>21.4. RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</H1
NAME="AEN3195"
>21.4. RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</A
></H1
><P
>By default RedHat Rembrandt-II during installation adds an
entry to /etc/hosts as follows:
@ -257,6 +257,27 @@ is the master browse list holder and who is the master browser.</P
>Corrective Action: Delete the entry after the word loopback
in the line starting 127.0.0.1</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3201"
>21.5. AIX</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN3203"
>21.5.1. Sequential Read Ahead</A
></H2
><P
>Disabling Sequential Read Ahead using "vmtune -r 0" improves
samba performance significally.</P
></DIV
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"

236
docs/htmldocs/printing.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Printing Support</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2054"
></A
>13.1. Introduction</H1
NAME="AEN1957"
>13.1. Introduction</A
></H1
><P
>Beginning with the 2.2.0 release, Samba supports
the native Windows NT printing mechanisms implemented via
@ -163,9 +163,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2076"
></A
>13.2. Configuration</H1
NAME="AEN1979"
>13.2. Configuration</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="WARNING"
><P
@ -204,19 +204,15 @@ a printer$ service which provides read-only access via no
password in order to support printer driver downloads.</P
><P
>However, the initial implementation allowed for a
parameter named <TT
parameter named <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer driver location</I
></TT
>printer driver location</VAR
>
to be used on a per share basis to specify the location of
the driver files associated with that printer. Another
parameter named <TT
parameter named <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer driver</I
></TT
>printer driver</VAR
> provided
a means of defining the printer driver name to be sent to
the client.</P
@ -229,9 +225,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2084"
></A
>13.2.1. Creating [print$]</H2
NAME="AEN1987"
>13.2.1. Creating [print$]</A
></H2
><P
>In order to support the uploading of printer driver
files, you must first configure a file share named [print$].
@ -270,11 +266,9 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>The <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WRITELIST"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>write list</I
></TT
>write list</VAR
></A
> is used to allow administrative
level user accounts to have write access in order to update files
@ -414,12 +408,10 @@ one of two conditions must hold true:</P
must be a member of the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#PRINTERADMIN"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer
admin</I
></TT
admin</VAR
></A
> list.</P
></LI
@ -435,11 +427,9 @@ that all file shares are set to 'read only' by default.</P
><P
>Once you have created the required [print$] service and
associated subdirectories, simply log onto the Samba server using
a root (or <TT
a root (or <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer admin</I
></TT
>printer admin</VAR
>) account
from a Windows NT 4.0/2k client. Open "Network Neighbourhood" or
"My Network Places" and browse for the Samba host. Once you have located
@ -452,9 +442,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2119"
></A
>13.2.2. Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</H2
NAME="AEN2022"
>13.2.2. Setting Drivers for Existing Printers</A
></H2
><P
>The initial listing of printers in the Samba host's
Printers folder will have no real printer driver assigned
@ -524,9 +514,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2135"
></A
>13.2.3. Support a large number of printers</H2
NAME="AEN2038"
>13.2.3. Support a large number of printers</A
></H2
><P
>One issue that has arisen during the development
phase of Samba 2.2 is the need to support driver downloads for
@ -547,9 +537,9 @@ of how this could be accomplished:</P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>$ </TT
>$ </SAMP
>rpcclient pogo -U root%secret -c "enumdrivers"
Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3]
@ -563,9 +553,9 @@ Printer Driver Info 1:
Printer Driver Info 1:
Driver Name: [HP LaserJet 4Si/4SiMX PS]
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>$ </TT
>$ </SAMP
>rpcclient pogo -U root%secret -c "enumprinters"
Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3]
flags:[0x800000]
@ -573,13 +563,13 @@ Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3]
description:[POGO\\POGO\hp-print,NO DRIVER AVAILABLE FOR THIS PRINTER,]
comment:[]
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>$ </TT
>$ </SAMP
>rpcclient pogo -U root%secret \
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>&gt; </TT
>&#62; </SAMP
> -c "setdriver hp-print \"HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS\""
Domain=[NARNIA] OS=[Unix] Server=[Samba 2.2.0-alpha3]
Successfully set hp-print to driver HP LaserJet 4000 Series PS.</PRE
@ -590,9 +580,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2146"
></A
>13.2.4. Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</H2
NAME="AEN2049"
>13.2.4. Adding New Printers via the Windows NT APW</A
></H2
><P
>By default, Samba offers all printer shares defined in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
@ -607,11 +597,9 @@ Add Printer Wizard icon. The APW will be show only if</P
><P
>The connected user is able to successfully
execute an OpenPrinterEx(\\server) with administrative
privileges (i.e. root or <TT
privileges (i.e. root or <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>printer admin</I
></TT
>printer admin</VAR
>).
</P
></LI
@ -620,12 +608,10 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SHOWADDPRINTERWIZARD"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>show
add printer wizard = yes</I
></TT
add printer wizard = yes</VAR
></A
> (the default).
</P
@ -636,12 +622,10 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
server, the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ADDPRINTERCOMMAND"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add
printer command</I
></TT
printer command</VAR
></A
> must have a defined value. The program
hook must successfully add the printer to the system (i.e.
@ -658,35 +642,29 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
not exist, <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> will execute the <TT
> will execute the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add printer
command</I
></TT
command</VAR
> and reparse to the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>smb.conf</TT
>
to attempt to locate the new printer share. If the share is still not defined,
an error of "Access Denied" is returned to the client. Note that the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add printer program</I
></TT
>add printer program</VAR
> is executed under the context
of the connected user, not necessarily a root account.</P
><P
>There is a complementary <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#DELETEPRINTERCOMMAND"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>delete
printer command</I
></TT
printer command</VAR
></A
> for removing entries from the "Printers..."
folder.</P
@ -694,11 +672,9 @@ folder.</P
>The following is an example <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ADDPRINTERCOMMAN"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add printer command</I
></TT
>add printer command</VAR
></A
> script. It adds the appropriate entries to <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
@ -733,8 +709,8 @@ echo " :sd=/var/spool/lpd/$2:\\" &#62;&#62; $PRINTCAP
echo " :mx=0:ml=0:sh:\\" &#62;&#62; $PRINTCAP
echo " :lp=/usr/local/samba/var/print/$5.prn:" &#62;&#62; $PRINTCAP
touch "/usr/local/samba/var/print/$5.prn" &#62;&#62; /tmp/printadd.$$ 2&#62;&amp;1
chown $LP "/usr/local/samba/var/print/$5.prn" &#62;&#62; /tmp/printadd.$$ 2&#62;&amp;1
touch "/usr/local/samba/var/print/$5.prn" &#62;&#62; /tmp/printadd.$$ 2&#62;&#38;1
chown $LP "/usr/local/samba/var/print/$5.prn" &#62;&#62; /tmp/printadd.$$ 2&#62;&#38;1
mkdir /var/spool/lpd/$2
chmod 700 /var/spool/lpd/$2
@ -759,9 +735,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2176"
></A
>13.2.5. Samba and Printer Ports</H2
NAME="AEN2079"
>13.2.5. Samba and Printer Ports</A
></H2
><P
>Windows NT/2000 print servers associate a port with each printer. These normally
take the form of LPT1:, COM1:, FILE:, etc... Samba must also support the
@ -780,12 +756,10 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
> possesses a <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#ENUMPORTSCOMMAND"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>enumports
command</I
></TT
command</VAR
></A
> which can be used to define an external program
that generates a listing of ports on a system.</P
@ -796,9 +770,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2184"
></A
>13.3. The Imprints Toolset</H1
NAME="AEN2087"
>13.3. The Imprints Toolset</A
></H1
><P
>The Imprints tool set provides a UNIX equivalent of the
Windows NT Add Printer Wizard. For complete information, please
@ -814,9 +788,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2188"
></A
>13.3.1. What is Imprints?</H2
NAME="AEN2091"
>13.3.1. What is Imprints?</A
></H2
><P
>Imprints is a collection of tools for supporting the goals
of</P
@ -846,9 +820,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2198"
></A
>13.3.2. Creating Printer Driver Packages</H2
NAME="AEN2101"
>13.3.2. Creating Printer Driver Packages</A
></H2
><P
>The process of creating printer driver packages is beyond
the scope of this document (refer to Imprints.txt also included
@ -862,9 +836,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2201"
></A
>13.3.3. The Imprints server</H2
NAME="AEN2104"
>13.3.3. The Imprints server</A
></H2
><P
>The Imprints server is really a database server that
may be queried via standard HTTP mechanisms. Each printer
@ -886,9 +860,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2205"
></A
>13.3.4. The Installation Client</H2
NAME="AEN2108"
>13.3.4. The Installation Client</A
></H2
><P
>More information regarding the Imprints installation client
is available in the <TT
@ -980,17 +954,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2227"
></A
>13.4. Diagnosis</H1
NAME="AEN2130"
>13.4. Diagnosis</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2229"
></A
>13.4.1. Introduction</H2
NAME="AEN2132"
>13.4.1. Introduction</A
></H2
><P
>This is a short description of how to debug printing problems with
Samba. This describes how to debug problems with printing from a SMB
@ -1052,7 +1026,7 @@ and it should be periodically cleaned out. Samba used the lpq
command to determine the "job number" assigned to your print job
by the spooler.</P
><P
>The %&gt;letter&lt; are "macros" that get dynamically replaced with appropriate
>The %&#62;letter&#60; are "macros" that get dynamically replaced with appropriate
values when they are used. The %s gets replaced with the name of the spool
file that Samba creates and the %p gets replaced with the name of the
printer. The %j gets replaced with the "job number" which comes from
@ -1063,9 +1037,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2245"
></A
>13.4.2. Debugging printer problems</H2
NAME="AEN2148"
>13.4.2. Debugging printer problems</A
></H2
><P
>One way to debug printing problems is to start by replacing these
command with shell scripts that record the arguments and the contents
@ -1081,7 +1055,7 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
/usr/bin/id -p &#62;/tmp/tmp.print
# we run the command and save the error messages
# replace the command with the one appropriate for your system
/usr/bin/lpr -r -P$1 $2 2&#62;&#62;&amp;/tmp/tmp.print</PRE
/usr/bin/lpr -r -P$1 $2 2&#62;&#62;&#38;/tmp/tmp.print</PRE
></P
><P
>Then you print a file and try removing it. You may find that the
@ -1120,9 +1094,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2254"
></A
>13.4.3. What printers do I have?</H2
NAME="AEN2157"
>13.4.3. What printers do I have?</A
></H2
><P
>You can use the 'testprns' program to check to see if the printer
name you are using is recognized by Samba. For example, you can
@ -1149,9 +1123,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2262"
></A
>13.4.4. Setting up printcap and print servers</H2
NAME="AEN2165"
>13.4.4. Setting up printcap and print servers</A
></H2
><P
>You may need to set up some printcaps for your Samba system to use.
It is strongly recommended that you use the facilities provided by
@ -1233,9 +1207,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2290"
></A
>13.4.5. Job sent, no output</H2
NAME="AEN2193"
>13.4.5. Job sent, no output</A
></H2
><P
>This is the most frustrating part of printing. You may have sent the
job, verified that the job was forwarded, set up a wrapper around
@ -1278,9 +1252,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2301"
></A
>13.4.6. Job sent, strange output</H2
NAME="AEN2204"
>13.4.6. Job sent, strange output</A
></H2
><P
>Once you have the job printing, you can then start worrying about
making it print nicely.</P
@ -1324,9 +1298,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2313"
></A
>13.4.7. Raw PostScript printed</H2
NAME="AEN2216"
>13.4.7. Raw PostScript printed</A
></H2
><P
>This is a problem that is usually caused by either the print spooling
system putting information at the start of the print job that makes
@ -1339,9 +1313,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2316"
></A
>13.4.8. Advanced Printing</H2
NAME="AEN2219"
>13.4.8. Advanced Printing</A
></H2
><P
>Note that you can do some pretty magic things by using your
imagination with the "print command" option and some shell scripts.
@ -1355,9 +1329,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2319"
></A
>13.4.9. Real debugging</H2
NAME="AEN2222"
>13.4.9. Real debugging</A
></H2
><P
>If the above debug tips don't help, then maybe you need to bring in
the bug guns, system tracing. See Tracing.txt in this directory.</P

445
docs/htmldocs/pwencrypt.html
View File

@ -1,445 +0,0 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="General installation"
HREF="introduction.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide"
HREF="browsing-quick.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="User information database"
HREF="passdb.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="browsing-quick.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="passdb.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="CHAPTER"
><H1
><A
NAME="PWENCRYPT"
></A
>Chapter 4. LanMan and NT Password Encryption in Samba</H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN457"
></A
>4.1. Introduction</H1
><P
>Newer windows clients send encrypted passwords over
the wire, instead of plain text passwords. The newest clients
will only send encrypted passwords and refuse to send plain text
passwords, unless their registry is tweaked.</P
><P
>These passwords can't be converted to unix style encrypted
passwords. Because of that you can't use the standard unix
user database, and you have to store the Lanman and NT hashes
somewhere else. For more information, see the documentation
about the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>passdb backend = </B
> parameter.
</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN462"
></A
>4.2. Important Notes About Security</H1
><P
>The unix and SMB password encryption techniques seem similar
on the surface. This similarity is, however, only skin deep. The unix
scheme typically sends clear text passwords over the network when
logging in. This is bad. The SMB encryption scheme never sends the
cleartext password over the network but it does store the 16 byte
hashed values on disk. This is also bad. Why? Because the 16 byte hashed
values are a "password equivalent". You cannot derive the user's
password from them, but they could potentially be used in a modified
client to gain access to a server. This would require considerable
technical knowledge on behalf of the attacker but is perfectly possible.
You should thus treat the smbpasswd file as though it contained the
cleartext passwords of all your users. Its contents must be kept
secret, and the file should be protected accordingly.</P
><P
>Ideally we would like a password scheme which neither requires
plain text passwords on the net or on disk. Unfortunately this
is not available as Samba is stuck with being compatible with
other SMB systems (WinNT, WfWg, Win95 etc). </P
><DIV
CLASS="WARNING"
><P
></P
><TABLE
CLASS="WARNING"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="25"
ALIGN="CENTER"
VALIGN="TOP"
><IMG
SRC="/usr/share/sgml/docbook/stylesheet/dsssl/modular/images/warning.gif"
HSPACE="5"
ALT="Warning"></TD
><TD
ALIGN="LEFT"
VALIGN="TOP"
><P
>Note that Windows NT 4.0 Service pack 3 changed the
default for permissible authentication so that plaintext
passwords are <SPAN
CLASS="emphasis"
><I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
>never</I
></SPAN
> sent over the wire.
The solution to this is either to switch to encrypted passwords
with Samba or edit the Windows NT registry to re-enable plaintext
passwords. See the document WinNT.txt for details on how to do
this.</P
><P
>Other Microsoft operating systems which also exhibit
this behavior includes</P
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>MS DOS Network client 3.0 with
the basic network redirector installed</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Windows 95 with the network redirector
update installed</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Windows 98 [se]</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>Windows 2000</P
></LI
></UL
><P
><SPAN
CLASS="emphasis"
><I
CLASS="EMPHASIS"
>Note :</I
></SPAN
>All current release of
Microsoft SMB/CIFS clients support authentication via the
SMB Challenge/Response mechanism described here. Enabling
clear text authentication does not disable the ability
of the client to participate in encrypted authentication.</P
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN481"
></A
>4.2.1. Advantages of SMB Encryption</H2
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>plain text passwords are not passed across
the network. Someone using a network sniffer cannot just
record passwords going to the SMB server.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>WinNT doesn't like talking to a server
that isn't using SMB encrypted passwords. It will refuse
to browse the server if the server is also in user level
security mode. It will insist on prompting the user for the
password on each connection, which is very annoying. The
only things you can do to stop this is to use SMB encryption.
</P
></LI
></UL
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN488"
></A
>4.2.2. Advantages of non-encrypted passwords</H2
><P
></P
><UL
><LI
><P
>plain text passwords are not kept
on disk. </P
></LI
><LI
><P
>uses same password file as other unix
services such as login and ftp</P
></LI
><LI
><P
>you are probably already using other
services (such as telnet and ftp) which send plain text
passwords over the net, so sending them for SMB isn't
such a big deal.</P
></LI
></UL
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN497"
></A
>4.3. The smbpasswd Command</H1
><P
>The smbpasswd command maintains the two 32 byte password fields
in the smbpasswd file. If you wish to make it similar to the unix
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>passwd</B
> or <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>yppasswd</B
> programs,
install it in <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/usr/local/samba/bin/</TT
> (or your
main Samba binary directory).</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd</B
> now works in a client-server mode
where it contacts the local smbd to change the user's password on its
behalf. This has enormous benefits - as follows.</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd</B
> now has the capability
to change passwords on Windows NT servers (this only works when
the request is sent to the NT Primary Domain Controller if you
are changing an NT Domain user's password).</P
><P
>To run smbpasswd as a normal user just type :</P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>$ </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>smbpasswd</B
></TT
></P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>Old SMB password: </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>&lt;type old value here -
or hit return if there was no old password&gt;</B
></TT
></P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>New SMB Password: </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>&lt;type new value&gt;
</B
></TT
></P
><P
><TT
CLASS="PROMPT"
>Repeat New SMB Password: </TT
><TT
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>&lt;re-type new value
</B
></TT
></P
><P
>If the old value does not match the current value stored for
that user, or the two new values do not match each other, then the
password will not be changed.</P
><P
>If invoked by an ordinary user it will only allow the user
to change his or her own Samba password.</P
><P
>If run by the root user smbpasswd may take an optional
argument, specifying the user name whose SMB password you wish to
change. Note that when run as root smbpasswd does not prompt for
or check the old password value, thus allowing root to set passwords
for users who have forgotten their passwords.</P
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd</B
> is designed to work in the same way
and be familiar to UNIX users who use the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>passwd</B
> or
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>yppasswd</B
> commands.</P
><P
>For more details on using <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd</B
> refer
to the man page which will always be the definitive reference.</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="browsing-quick.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="H"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="passdb.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Quick Cross Subnet Browsing / Cross Workgroup Browsing guide</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="introduction.html"
ACCESSKEY="U"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>User information database</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

108
docs/htmldocs/rpcclient.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>rpcclient</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>rpcclient</B
> [-A authfile] [-c &lt;command string&gt;] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logfile] [-N] [-s &lt;smb config file&gt;] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N] [-I destinationIP] {server}</P
> [-A authfile] [-c &#60;command string&#62;] [-d debuglevel] [-h] [-l logfile] [-N] [-s &#60;smb config file&#62;] [-U username[%password]] [-W workgroup] [-N] [-I destinationIP] {server}</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -86,11 +86,9 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
resolved using the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NAMERESOLVEORDER"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name resolve order</I
></TT
>name resolve order</VAR
></A
> line from <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
@ -111,9 +109,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>username = &lt;value&gt;
password = &lt;value&gt;
domain = &lt;value&gt;</PRE
>username = &#60;value&#62;
password = &#60;value&#62;
domain = &#60;value&#62;</PRE
></P
><P
>Make certain that the permissions on the file restrict
@ -136,11 +134,9 @@ domain = &lt;value&gt;</PRE
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
><DD
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>debuglevel</I
></TT
>debuglevel</VAR
> is an integer
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
not specified is zero.</P
@ -177,21 +173,17 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>-I IP-address</DT
><DD
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>IP address</I
></TT
>IP address</VAR
> is the address of the server to connect to.
It should be specified in standard "a.b.c.d" notation. </P
><P
>Normally the client would attempt to locate a named
SMB/CIFS server by looking it up via the NetBIOS name resolution
mechanism described above in the <TT
mechanism described above in the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name resolve order</I
></TT
>name resolve order</VAR
>
parameter above. Using this parameter will force the client
to assume that the server is on the machine with the specified IP
@ -207,9 +199,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><DD
><P
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
<TT
<CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>'.client'</TT
>'.client'</CODE
> will be appended. The log file is
never removed by the client.
</P
@ -226,11 +218,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
CLASS="COMMAND"
>rpcclient</B
> will
prompt for a password. See also the <TT
prompt for a password. See also the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-U</I
></TT
>-U</VAR
>
option.</P
></DD
@ -251,18 +241,18 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>Sets the SMB username or username and password. </P
><P
>If %password is not specified, the user will be prompted. The
client will first check the <TT
client will first check the <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>USER</TT
>USER</VAR
> environment variable, then the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>LOGNAME</TT
>LOGNAME</VAR
> variable and if either exists, the
string is uppercased. If these environmental variables are not
found, the username <TT
found, the username <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>GUEST</TT
>GUEST</CODE
> is used. </P
><P
>A third option is to use a credentials file which
@ -271,11 +261,9 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment
variables. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions
on the file restrict access from unwanted users. See the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-A</I
></TT
>-A</VAR
> for more details. </P
><P
>Be cautious about including passwords in scripts. Also, on
@ -441,7 +429,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>adddriver &lt;arch&gt; &lt;config&gt;</B
>adddriver &#60;arch&#62; &#60;config&#62;</B
>
- Execute an AddPrinterDriver() RPC to install the printer driver
information on the server. Note that the driver files should
@ -450,21 +438,17 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getdriverdir</B
>. Possible values for
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>arch</I
></TT
>arch</VAR
> are the same as those for
the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getdriverdir</B
> command.
The <TT
The <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>config</I
></TT
>config</VAR
> parameter is defined as
follows: </P
><P
@ -493,8 +477,8 @@ Comma Separated list of Files</PRE
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>addprinter &lt;printername&gt;
&lt;sharename&gt; &lt;drivername&gt; &lt;port&gt;</B
>addprinter &#60;printername&#62;
&#60;sharename&#62; &#60;drivername&#62; &#60;port&#62;</B
>
- Add a printer on the remote server. This printer
will be automatically shared. Be aware that the printer driver
@ -502,11 +486,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
CLASS="COMMAND"
>adddriver</B
>)
and the <TT
and the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>port</I
></TT
>port</VAR
>must be a valid port name (see
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -540,7 +522,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>enumjobs &lt;printer&gt;</B
>enumjobs &#60;printer&#62;</B
>
- List the jobs and status of a given printer.
This command corresponds to the MS Platform SDK EnumJobs()
@ -582,7 +564,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getdata &lt;printername&gt;</B
>getdata &#60;printername&#62;</B
>
- Retrieve the data for a given printer setting. See
the <B
@ -596,7 +578,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getdriver &lt;printername&gt;</B
>getdriver &#60;printername&#62;</B
>
- Retrieve the printer driver information (such as driver file,
config file, dependent files, etc...) for
@ -608,16 +590,14 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getdriverdir &lt;arch&gt;</B
>getdriverdir &#60;arch&#62;</B
>
- Execute a GetPrinterDriverDirectory()
RPC to retrieve the SMB share name and subdirectory for
storing printer driver files for a given architecture. Possible
values for <TT
values for <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>arch</I
></TT
>arch</VAR
> are "Windows 4.0"
(for Windows 95/98), "Windows NT x86", "Windows NT PowerPC", "Windows
Alpha_AXP", and "Windows NT R4000". </P
@ -626,7 +606,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getprinter &lt;printername&gt;</B
>getprinter &#60;printername&#62;</B
>
- Retrieve the current printer information. This command
corresponds to the GetPrinter() MS Platform SDK function.
@ -636,7 +616,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>openprinter &lt;printername&gt;</B
>openprinter &#60;printername&#62;</B
>
- Execute an OpenPrinterEx() and ClosePrinter() RPC
against a given printer. </P
@ -645,8 +625,8 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>setdriver &lt;printername&gt;
&lt;drivername&gt;</B
>setdriver &#60;printername&#62;
&#60;drivername&#62;</B
>
- Execute a SetPrinter() command to update the printer driver
associated with an installed printer. The printer driver must

56
docs/htmldocs/samba-bdc.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>How to Act as a Backup Domain Controller in a Purely Samba Controlled Domain</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1274"
></A
>6.1. Prerequisite Reading</H1
NAME="AEN1177"
>6.1. Prerequisite Reading</A
></H1
><P
>Before you continue reading in this chapter, please make sure
that you are comfortable with configuring a Samba PDC
@ -97,9 +97,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1278"
></A
>6.2. Background</H1
NAME="AEN1181"
>6.2. Background</A
></H1
><P
>What is a Domain Controller? It is a machine that is able to answer
logon requests from workstations in a Windows NT Domain. Whenever a
@ -142,9 +142,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1286"
></A
>6.3. What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</H1
NAME="AEN1189"
>6.3. What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</A
></H1
><P
>Every machine that is a Domain Controller for the domain SAMBA has to
register the NetBIOS group name SAMBA#1c with the WINS server and/or
@ -159,9 +159,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1289"
></A
>6.3.1. How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</H2
NAME="AEN1192"
>6.3.1. How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</A
></H2
><P
>A NT workstation in the domain SAMBA that wants a local user to be
authenticated has to find the domain controller for SAMBA. It does
@ -178,9 +178,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1292"
></A
>6.3.2. When is the PDC needed?</H2
NAME="AEN1195"
>6.3.2. When is the PDC needed?</A
></H2
><P
>Whenever a user wants to change his password, this has to be done on
the PDC. To find the PDC, the workstation does a NetBIOS name query
@ -194,9 +194,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1295"
></A
>6.4. Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller to an NT PDC?</H1
NAME="AEN1198"
>6.4. Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller to an NT PDC?</A
></H1
><P
>With version 2.2, no. The native NT SAM replication protocols have
not yet been fully implemented. The Samba Team is working on
@ -217,9 +217,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1300"
></A
>6.5. How do I set up a Samba BDC?</H1
NAME="AEN1203"
>6.5. How do I set up a Samba BDC?</A
></H1
><P
>Several things have to be done:</P
><P
@ -284,9 +284,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1317"
></A
>6.5.1. How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</H2
NAME="AEN1220"
>6.5.1. How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</A
></H2
><P
>Replication of the smbpasswd file is sensitive. It has to be done
whenever changes to the SAM are made. Every user's password change is
@ -305,9 +305,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1321"
></A
>6.5.2. Can I do this all with LDAP?</H2
NAME="AEN1224"
>6.5.2. Can I do this all with LDAP?</A
></H2
><P
>The simple answer is YES. Samba's pdb_ldap code supports
binding to a replica LDAP server, and will also follow referrals and

424
docs/htmldocs/samba-howto-collection.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="General installation"
HREF="introduction.html"></HEAD
@ -27,8 +27,8 @@ CLASS="TITLEPAGE"
CLASS="TITLE"
><A
NAME="SAMBA-HOWTO-COLLECTION"
></A
>SAMBA Project Documentation</H1
>SAMBA Project Documentation</A
></H1
><H3
CLASS="AUTHOR"
><A
@ -102,57 +102,33 @@ HREF="install.html"
><DT
>1.1. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN26"
>Read the man pages</A
>Obtaining and installing samba</A
></DT
><DT
>1.2. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN36"
>Building the Binaries</A
HREF="install.html#AEN31"
>Configuring samba</A
></DT
><DT
>1.3. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN64"
>The all important step</A
></DT
><DT
>1.4. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN68"
>Create the smb configuration file.</A
></DT
><DT
>1.5. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN82"
>Test your config file with
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>testparm</B
></A
></DT
><DT
>1.6. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN90"
>Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
></DT
><DT
>1.7. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN145"
>Try listing the shares available on your
server</A
></DT
><DT
>1.8. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN154"
>1.4. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN73"
>Try connecting with the unix client</A
></DT
><DT
>1.9. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN170"
>1.5. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN89"
>Try connecting from a DOS, WfWg, Win9x, WinNT,
Win2k, OS/2, etc... client</A
></DT
><DT
>1.10. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN184"
>1.6. <A
HREF="install.html#AEN103"
>What If Things Don't Work?</A
></DT
></DL
@ -166,32 +142,32 @@ HREF="browsing-quick.html"
><DL
><DT
>2.1. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN230"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN130"
>Discussion</A
></DT
><DT
>2.2. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN238"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN139"
>Use of the "Remote Announce" parameter</A
></DT
><DT
>2.3. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN252"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN153"
>Use of the "Remote Browse Sync" parameter</A
></DT
><DT
>2.4. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN257"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN158"
>Use of WINS</A
></DT
><DT
>2.5. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN268"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN169"
>Do NOT use more than one (1) protocol on MS Windows machines</A
></DT
><DT
>2.6. <A
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN274"
HREF="browsing-quick.html#AEN177"
>Name Resolution Order</A
></DT
></DL
@ -205,42 +181,42 @@ HREF="passdb.html"
><DL
><DT
>3.1. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN324"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN227"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>3.2. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN331"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN234"
>Important Notes About Security</A
></DT
><DT
>3.3. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN357"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN260"
>The smbpasswd Command</A
></DT
><DT
>3.4. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN388"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN291"
>Plain text</A
></DT
><DT
>3.5. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN393"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN296"
>TDB</A
></DT
><DT
>3.6. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN396"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN299"
>LDAP</A
></DT
><DT
>3.7. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN614"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN517"
>MySQL</A
></DT
><DT
>3.8. <A
HREF="passdb.html#AEN662"
HREF="passdb.html#AEN565"
>Passdb XML plugin</A
></DT
></DL
@ -268,49 +244,49 @@ HREF="samba-pdc.html"
><DL
><DT
>5.1. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN722"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN625"
>Prerequisite Reading</A
></DT
><DT
>5.2. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN728"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN631"
>Background</A
></DT
><DT
>5.3. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN767"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN670"
>Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A
></DT
><DT
>5.4. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN810"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN713"
>Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the
Domain</A
></DT
><DT
>5.5. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN894"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN797"
>Common Problems and Errors</A
></DT
><DT
>5.6. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN942"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN845"
>System Policies and Profiles</A
></DT
><DT
>5.7. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN986"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN889"
>What other help can I get?</A
></DT
><DT
>5.8. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1100"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1003"
>Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A
></DT
><DT
>5.9. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1238"
>DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control &amp; Samba</A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1141"
>DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control &#38; Samba</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
@ -323,27 +299,27 @@ HREF="samba-bdc.html"
><DL
><DT
>6.1. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1274"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1177"
>Prerequisite Reading</A
></DT
><DT
>6.2. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1278"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1181"
>Background</A
></DT
><DT
>6.3. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1286"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1189"
>What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</A
></DT
><DT
>6.4. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1295"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1198"
>Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller to an NT PDC?</A
></DT
><DT
>6.5. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1300"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1203"
>How do I set up a Samba BDC?</A
></DT
></DL
@ -357,42 +333,42 @@ HREF="ads.html"
><DL
><DT
>7.1. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1339"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1242"
>Installing the required packages for Debian</A
></DT
><DT
>7.2. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1346"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1249"
>Installing the required packages for RedHat</A
></DT
><DT
>7.3. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1356"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1259"
>Compile Samba</A
></DT
><DT
>7.4. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1371"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1274"
>Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</A
></DT
><DT
>7.5. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1381"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1284"
>Create the computer account</A
></DT
><DT
>7.6. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1393"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1296"
>Test your server setup</A
></DT
><DT
>7.7. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1398"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1301"
>Testing with smbclient</A
></DT
><DT
>7.8. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1401"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1304"
>Notes</A
></DT
></DL
@ -406,17 +382,17 @@ HREF="domain-security.html"
><DL
><DT
>8.1. <A
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1423"
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1326"
>Joining an NT Domain with Samba 3.0</A
></DT
><DT
>8.2. <A
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1478"
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1381"
>Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A
></DT
><DT
>8.3. <A
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1481"
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1384"
>Why is this better than security = server?</A
></DT
></DL
@ -439,34 +415,34 @@ HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html"
><DL
><DT
>9.1. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1513"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1416"
>Agenda</A
></DT
><DT
>9.2. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1535"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1438"
>Name Resolution in a pure Unix/Linux world</A
></DT
><DT
>9.3. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1598"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1501"
>Name resolution as used within MS Windows networking</A
></DT
><DT
>9.4. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1643"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1546"
>How browsing functions and how to deploy stable and
dependable browsing using Samba</A
></DT
><DT
>9.5. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1653"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1556"
>MS Windows security options and how to configure
Samba for seemless integration</A
></DT
><DT
>9.6. <A
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1723"
HREF="integrate-ms-networks.html#AEN1626"
>Conclusions</A
></DT
></DL
@ -480,39 +456,39 @@ HREF="unix-permissions.html"
><DL
><DT
>10.1. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1744"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1647"
>Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
security dialogs</A
></DT
><DT
>10.2. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1748"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1651"
>How to view file security on a Samba share</A
></DT
><DT
>10.3. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1759"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1662"
>Viewing file ownership</A
></DT
><DT
>10.4. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1779"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1682"
>Viewing file or directory permissions</A
></DT
><DT
>10.5. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1815"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1718"
>Modifying file or directory permissions</A
></DT
><DT
>10.6. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1837"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1740"
>Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
parameters</A
></DT
><DT
>10.7. <A
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1901"
HREF="unix-permissions.html#AEN1804"
>Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
mapping</A
></DT
@ -528,17 +504,17 @@ managed authentication</A
><DL
><DT
>11.1. <A
HREF="pam.html#AEN1922"
HREF="pam.html#AEN1825"
>Samba and PAM</A
></DT
><DT
>11.2. <A
HREF="pam.html#AEN1966"
HREF="pam.html#AEN1869"
>Distributed Authentication</A
></DT
><DT
>11.3. <A
HREF="pam.html#AEN1973"
HREF="pam.html#AEN1876"
>PAM Configuration in smb.conf</A
></DT
></DL
@ -552,7 +528,7 @@ HREF="msdfs.html"
><DL
><DT
>12.1. <A
HREF="msdfs.html#AEN1993"
HREF="msdfs.html#AEN1896"
>Instructions</A
></DT
></DL
@ -566,22 +542,22 @@ HREF="printing.html"
><DL
><DT
>13.1. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2054"
HREF="printing.html#AEN1957"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>13.2. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2076"
HREF="printing.html#AEN1979"
>Configuration</A
></DT
><DT
>13.3. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2184"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2087"
>The Imprints Toolset</A
></DT
><DT
>13.4. <A
HREF="printing.html#AEN2227"
HREF="printing.html#AEN2130"
>Diagnosis</A
></DT
></DL
@ -595,37 +571,37 @@ HREF="winbind.html"
><DL
><DT
>14.1. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2360"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2263"
>Abstract</A
></DT
><DT
>14.2. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2364"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2267"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>14.3. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2377"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2280"
>What Winbind Provides</A
></DT
><DT
>14.4. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2388"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2291"
>How Winbind Works</A
></DT
><DT
>14.5. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2431"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2334"
>Installation and Configuration</A
></DT
><DT
>14.6. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2680"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2583"
>Limitations</A
></DT
><DT
>14.7. <A
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2690"
HREF="winbind.html#AEN2593"
>Conclusion</A
></DT
></DL
@ -639,57 +615,57 @@ HREF="improved-browsing.html"
><DL
><DT
>15.1. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2700"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2603"
>Overview of browsing</A
></DT
><DT
>15.2. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2704"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2608"
>Browsing support in samba</A
></DT
><DT
>15.3. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2713"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2616"
>Problem resolution</A
></DT
><DT
>15.4. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2720"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2625"
>Browsing across subnets</A
></DT
><DT
>15.5. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2760"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2665"
>Setting up a WINS server</A
></DT
><DT
>15.6. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2779"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2684"
>Setting up Browsing in a WORKGROUP</A
></DT
><DT
>15.7. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2797"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2702"
>Setting up Browsing in a DOMAIN</A
></DT
><DT
>15.8. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2807"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2712"
>Forcing samba to be the master</A
></DT
><DT
>15.9. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2816"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2721"
>Making samba the domain master</A
></DT
><DT
>15.10. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2834"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2739"
>Note about broadcast addresses</A
></DT
><DT
>15.11. <A
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2837"
HREF="improved-browsing.html#AEN2742"
>Multiple interfaces</A
></DT
></DL
@ -703,125 +679,145 @@ HREF="vfs.html"
><DL
><DT
>16.1. <A
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2855"
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2760"
>Introduction and configuration</A
></DT
><DT
>16.2. <A
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2864"
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2769"
>Included modules</A
></DT
><DT
>16.3. <A
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2918"
HREF="vfs.html#AEN2823"
>VFS modules available elsewhere</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>17. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html"
>Access Samba source code via CVS</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>17.1. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2942"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>17.2. <A
HREF="cvs-access.html#AEN2947"
>CVS Access to samba.org</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>18. <A
HREF="groupmapping.html"
>Group mapping HOWTO</A
></DT
><DT
>19. <A
>18. <A
HREF="speed.html"
>Samba performance issues</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>19.1. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3033"
>18.1. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2890"
>Comparisons</A
></DT
><DT
>19.2. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3039"
>18.2. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2896"
>Socket options</A
></DT
><DT
>19.3. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3046"
>18.3. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2903"
>Read size</A
></DT
><DT
>19.4. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3051"
>18.4. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2908"
>Max xmit</A
></DT
><DT
>19.5. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3056"
>18.5. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2913"
>Log level</A
></DT
><DT
>19.6. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3059"
>18.6. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2916"
>Read raw</A
></DT
><DT
>19.7. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3064"
>18.7. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2921"
>Write raw</A
></DT
><DT
>19.8. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3068"
>18.8. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2925"
>Slow Clients</A
></DT
><DT
>19.9. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3072"
>18.9. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2929"
>Slow Logins</A
></DT
><DT
>19.10. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN3075"
>18.10. <A
HREF="speed.html#AEN2932"
>Client tuning</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>20. <A
>19. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html"
>Creating Group Profiles</A
>Creating Group Prolicy Files</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>19.1. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN2980"
>Windows '9x</A
></DT
><DT
>19.2. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN2990"
>Windows NT 4</A
></DT
><DT
>19.3. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3028"
>Windows 2000/XP</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>20. <A
HREF="securing-samba.html"
>Securing Samba</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>20.1. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3123"
>Windows '9x</A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3109"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>20.2. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3132"
>Windows NT 4</A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3112"
>Using host based protection</A
></DT
><DT
>20.3. <A
HREF="groupprofiles.html#AEN3170"
>Windows 2000/XP</A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3119"
>Using interface protection</A
></DT
><DT
>20.4. <A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3128"
>Using a firewall</A
></DT
><DT
>20.5. <A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3135"
>Using a IPC$ share deny</A
></DT
><DT
>20.6. <A
HREF="securing-samba.html#AEN3144"
>Upgrading Samba</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
@ -843,24 +839,29 @@ HREF="portability.html"
><DL
><DT
>21.1. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3251"
HREF="portability.html#AEN3156"
>HPUX</A
></DT
><DT
>21.2. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3257"
HREF="portability.html#AEN3162"
>SCO Unix</A
></DT
><DT
>21.3. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3261"
HREF="portability.html#AEN3166"
>DNIX</A
></DT
><DT
>21.4. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3290"
HREF="portability.html#AEN3195"
>RedHat Linux Rembrandt-II</A
></DT
><DT
>21.5. <A
HREF="portability.html#AEN3201"
>AIX</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
@ -872,95 +873,124 @@ HREF="other-clients.html"
><DL
><DT
>22.1. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3311"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3221"
>Macintosh clients?</A
></DT
><DT
>22.2. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3320"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3230"
>OS2 Client</A
></DT
><DT
>22.3. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3360"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3270"
>Windows for Workgroups</A
></DT
><DT
>22.4. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3381"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3294"
>Windows '95/'98</A
></DT
><DT
>22.5. <A
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3397"
HREF="other-clients.html#AEN3310"
>Windows 2000 Service Pack 2</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>23. <A
HREF="compiling.html"
>How to compile SAMBA</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>23.1. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3337"
>Access Samba source code via CVS</A
></DT
><DT
>23.2. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3380"
>Accessing the samba sources via rsync and ftp</A
></DT
><DT
>23.3. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3386"
>Building the Binaries</A
></DT
><DT
>23.4. <A
HREF="compiling.html#AEN3414"
>Starting the smbd and nmbd</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>24. <A
HREF="bugreport.html"
>Reporting Bugs</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>23.1. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3421"
>24.1. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3476"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>23.2. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3431"
>24.2. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3486"
>General info</A
></DT
><DT
>23.3. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3437"
>24.3. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3492"
>Debug levels</A
></DT
><DT
>23.4. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3454"
>24.4. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3509"
>Internal errors</A
></DT
><DT
>23.5. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3464"
>24.5. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3519"
>Attaching to a running process</A
></DT
><DT
>23.6. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3467"
>24.6. <A
HREF="bugreport.html#AEN3522"
>Patches</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>24. <A
>25. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html"
>Diagnosing your samba server</A
>The samba checklist</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>24.1. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3490"
>25.1. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3545"
>Introduction</A
></DT
><DT
>24.2. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3495"
>25.2. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3550"
>Assumptions</A
></DT
><DT
>24.3. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3505"
>25.3. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3560"
>Tests</A
></DT
><DT
>24.4. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3615"
>25.4. <A
HREF="diagnosis.html#AEN3670"
>Still having troubles?</A
></DT
></DL

1011
docs/htmldocs/samba-ldap-howto.html
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

266
docs/htmldocs/samba-pdc.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Samba as a NT4 or Win2k Primary Domain Controller</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN722"
></A
>5.1. Prerequisite Reading</H1
NAME="AEN625"
>5.1. Prerequisite Reading</A
></H1
><P
>Before you continue reading in this chapter, please make sure
that you are comfortable with configuring basic files services
@ -108,9 +108,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN728"
></A
>5.2. Background</H1
NAME="AEN631"
>5.2. Background</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="NOTE"
><P
@ -260,9 +260,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN767"
></A
>5.3. Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</H1
NAME="AEN670"
>5.3. Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A
></H1
><P
>The first step in creating a working Samba PDC is to
understand the parameters necessary in smb.conf. I will not
@ -288,21 +288,17 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NETBIOSNAME"
TARGET="_top"
>netbios name</A
> = <TT
> = <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>POGO</I
></TT
>POGO</VAR
>
<A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WORKGROUP"
TARGET="_top"
>workgroup</A
> = <TT
> = <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>NARNIA</I
></TT
>NARNIA</VAR
>
; we should act as the domain and local master browser
@ -392,11 +388,9 @@ TARGET="_top"
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WRITELIST"
TARGET="_top"
>write list</A
> = <TT
> = <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>ntadmin</I
></TT
>ntadmin</VAR
>
; share for storing user profiles
@ -472,10 +466,10 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN810"
></A
NAME="AEN713"
>5.4. Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the
Domain</H1
Domain</A
></H1
><P
>A machine trust account is a Samba account that is used to
authenticate a client machine (rather than a user) to the Samba
@ -546,9 +540,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN829"
></A
>5.4.1. Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</H2
NAME="AEN732"
>5.4.1. Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A
></H2
><P
>The first step in manually creating a machine trust account is to
manually create the corresponding Unix account in
@ -563,55 +557,45 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
used to create new Unix accounts. The following is an example for a
Linux based Samba server:</P
><P
> <TT
> <SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
>root# </SAMP
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>/usr/sbin/useradd -g 100 -d /dev/null -c <TT
>/usr/sbin/useradd -g 100 -d /dev/null -c <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>"machine
nickname"</I
></TT
> -s /bin/false <TT
nickname"</VAR
> -s /bin/false <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>machine_name</I
></TT
>machine_name</VAR
>$ </B
></P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
>root# </SAMP
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>passwd -l <TT
>passwd -l <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>machine_name</I
></TT
>machine_name</VAR
>$</B
></P
><P
>On *BSD systems, this can be done using the 'chpass' utility:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
>root# </SAMP
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>chpass -a "<TT
>chpass -a "<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>machine_name</I
></TT
>$:*:101:100::0:0:Workstation <TT
>machine_name</VAR
>$:*:101:100::0:0:Workstation <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>machine_name</I
></TT
>machine_name</VAR
>:/dev/null:/sbin/nologin"</B
></P
><P
@ -628,26 +612,20 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>doppy$:x:505:501:<TT
>doppy$:x:505:501:<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>machine_nickname</I
></TT
>machine_nickname</VAR
>:/dev/null:/bin/false</PRE
></P
><P
>Above, <TT
>Above, <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>machine_nickname</I
></TT
>machine_nickname</VAR
> can be any
descriptive name for the client, i.e., BasementComputer.
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>machine_name</I
></TT
>machine_name</VAR
> absolutely must be the NetBIOS
name of the client to be joined to the domain. The "$" must be
appended to the NetBIOS name of the client or Samba will not recognize
@ -665,24 +643,20 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
> command
as shown here:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
>root# </SAMP
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd -a -m <TT
>smbpasswd -a -m <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>machine_name</I
></TT
>machine_name</VAR
></B
></P
><P
>where <TT
>where <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>machine_name</I
></TT
>machine_name</VAR
> is the machine's NetBIOS
name. The RID of the new machine account is generated from the UID of
the corresponding Unix account.</P
@ -736,9 +710,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN870"
></A
>5.4.2. "On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</H2
NAME="AEN773"
>5.4.2. "On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A
></H2
><P
>The second (and recommended) way of creating machine trust accounts is
simply to allow the Samba server to create them as needed when the client
@ -764,7 +738,7 @@ be created manually.</P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>[global]
# &lt;...remainder of parameters...&gt;
# &#60;...remainder of parameters...&#62;
add user script = /usr/sbin/useradd -d /dev/null -g 100 -s /bin/false -M %u </PRE
></P
></DIV
@ -773,9 +747,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN879"
></A
>5.4.3. Joining the Client to the Domain</H2
NAME="AEN782"
>5.4.3. Joining the Client to the Domain</A
></H2
><P
>The procedure for joining a client to the domain varies with the
version of Windows.</P
@ -841,9 +815,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN894"
></A
>5.5. Common Problems and Errors</H1
NAME="AEN797"
>5.5. Common Problems and Errors</A
></H1
><P
></P
><P
@ -897,9 +871,9 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
will remove all network drive connections:
</P
><P
> <TT
> <SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>C:\WINNT\&#62;</TT
>C:\WINNT\&#62;</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>net use * /d</B
@ -962,11 +936,9 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
</P
><P
> This problem is caused by the PDC not having a suitable machine trust account.
If you are using the <TT
If you are using the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>add user script</I
></TT
>add user script</VAR
> method to create
accounts then this would indicate that it has not worked. Ensure the domain
admin user system is working.
@ -1010,11 +982,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
</P
><P
> In order to work around this problem in 2.2.0, configure the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>account</I
></TT
>account</VAR
> control flag in
<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
@ -1051,9 +1021,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN942"
></A
>5.6. System Policies and Profiles</H1
NAME="AEN845"
>5.6. System Policies and Profiles</A
></H1
><P
>Much of the information necessary to implement System Policies and
Roving User Profiles in a Samba domain is the same as that for
@ -1228,9 +1198,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN986"
></A
>5.7. What other help can I get?</H1
NAME="AEN889"
>5.7. What other help can I get?</A
></H1
><P
>There are many sources of information available in the form
of mailing lists, RFC's and documentation. The docs that come
@ -1648,9 +1618,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1100"
></A
>5.8. Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</H1
NAME="AEN1003"
>5.8. Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="NOTE"
><P
@ -1727,7 +1697,7 @@ TYPE="1"
><LI
><P
> The client broadcasts (to the IP broadcast address of the subnet it is in)
a NetLogon request. This is sent to the NetBIOS name DOMAIN&lt;1c&gt; at the
a NetLogon request. This is sent to the NetBIOS name DOMAIN&#60;1c&#62; at the
NetBIOS layer. The client chooses the first response it receives, which
contains the NetBIOS name of the logon server to use in the format of
\\SERVER.
@ -1782,9 +1752,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1126"
></A
>5.8.1. Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</H2
NAME="AEN1029"
>5.8.1. Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A
></H2
><P
>The main difference between a PDC and a Windows 9x logon
server configuration is that</P
@ -1837,20 +1807,20 @@ VALIGN="TOP"
>There are a few comments to make in order to tie up some
loose ends. There has been much debate over the issue of whether
or not it is ok to configure Samba as a Domain Controller in security
modes other than <TT
modes other than <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>USER</TT
>USER</CODE
>. The only security mode
which will not work due to technical reasons is <TT
which will not work due to technical reasons is <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>SHARE</TT
>SHARE</CODE
>
mode security. <TT
mode security. <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>DOMAIN</TT
> and <TT
>DOMAIN</CODE
> and <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>SERVER</TT
>SERVER</CODE
>
mode security is really just a variation on SMB user level security.</P
><P
@ -1888,9 +1858,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1145"
></A
>5.8.2. Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</H2
NAME="AEN1048"
>5.8.2. Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</A
></H2
><DIV
CLASS="WARNING"
><P
@ -1941,9 +1911,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1153"
></A
>5.8.2.1. Windows NT Configuration</H3
NAME="AEN1056"
>5.8.2.1. Windows NT Configuration</A
></H3
><P
>To support WinNT clients, in the [global] section of smb.conf set the
following (for example):</P
@ -1992,9 +1962,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1161"
></A
>5.8.2.2. Windows 9X Configuration</H3
NAME="AEN1064"
>5.8.2.2. Windows 9X Configuration</A
></H3
><P
>To support Win9X clients, you must use the "logon home" parameter. Samba has
now been fixed so that "net use/home" now works as well, and it, too, relies
@ -2023,9 +1993,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1169"
></A
>5.8.2.3. Win9X and WinNT Configuration</H3
NAME="AEN1072"
>5.8.2.3. Win9X and WinNT Configuration</A
></H3
><P
>You can support profiles for both Win9X and WinNT clients by setting both the
"logon home" and "logon path" parameters. For example:</P
@ -2068,9 +2038,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1176"
></A
>5.8.2.4. Windows 9X Profile Setup</H3
NAME="AEN1079"
>5.8.2.4. Windows 9X Profile Setup</A
></H3
><P
>When a user first logs in on Windows 9X, the file user.DAT is created,
as are folders "Start Menu", "Desktop", "Programs" and "Nethood".
@ -2228,9 +2198,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1212"
></A
>5.8.2.5. Windows NT Workstation 4.0</H3
NAME="AEN1115"
>5.8.2.5. Windows NT Workstation 4.0</A
></H3
><P
>When a user first logs in to a Windows NT Workstation, the profile
NTuser.DAT is created. The profile location can be now specified
@ -2342,9 +2312,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1225"
></A
>5.8.2.6. Windows NT Server</H3
NAME="AEN1128"
>5.8.2.6. Windows NT Server</A
></H3
><P
>There is nothing to stop you specifying any path that you like for the
location of users' profiles. Therefore, you could specify that the
@ -2356,9 +2326,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN1228"
></A
>5.8.2.7. Sharing Profiles between W95 and NT Workstation 4.0</H3
NAME="AEN1131"
>5.8.2.7. Sharing Profiles between W95 and NT Workstation 4.0</A
></H3
><DIV
CLASS="WARNING"
><P
@ -2449,9 +2419,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1238"
></A
>5.9. DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control &amp; Samba</H1
NAME="AEN1141"
>5.9. DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control &#38; Samba</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="WARNING"
><P
@ -2526,16 +2496,16 @@ may need to know to interact with the rest of the system.</P
>The registry files can be located on any Windows NT machine by opening a
command prompt and typing:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>C:\WINNT\&#62;</TT
>C:\WINNT\&#62;</SAMP
> dir %SystemRoot%\System32\config</P
><P
>The environment variable %SystemRoot% value can be obtained by typing:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>C:\WINNT&#62;</TT
>C:\WINNT&#62;</SAMP
>echo %SystemRoot%</P
><P
>The active parts of the registry that you may want to be familiar with are

2
docs/htmldocs/samba.7.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>samba</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"

307
docs/htmldocs/securing-samba.html Normal file
View File

@ -0,0 +1,307 @@
<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
<HTML
><HEAD
><TITLE
>Securing Samba</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
REL="UP"
TITLE="Optional configuration"
HREF="optional.html"><LINK
REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Creating Group Prolicy Files"
HREF="groupprofiles.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Appendixes"
HREF="appendixes.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
TEXT="#000000"
LINK="#0000FF"
VLINK="#840084"
ALINK="#0000FF"
><DIV
CLASS="NAVHEADER"
><TABLE
SUMMARY="Header navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TH
COLSPAN="3"
ALIGN="center"
>SAMBA Project Documentation</TH
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="groupprofiles.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="80%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="bottom"
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="appendixes.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
></TABLE
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="CHAPTER"
><H1
><A
NAME="SECURING-SAMBA"
></A
>Chapter 20. Securing Samba</H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3109"
>20.1. Introduction</A
></H1
><P
>This note was attached to the Samba 2.2.8 release notes as it contained an
important security fix. The information contained here applies to Samba
installations in general.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3112"
>20.2. Using host based protection</A
></H1
><P
>In many installations of Samba the greatest threat comes for outside
your immediate network. By default Samba will accept connections from
any host, which means that if you run an insecure version of Samba on
a host that is directly connected to the Internet you can be
especially vulnerable.</P
><P
>One of the simplest fixes in this case is to use the 'hosts allow' and
'hosts deny' options in the Samba smb.conf configuration file to only
allow access to your server from a specific range of hosts. An example
might be:</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
> hosts allow = 127.0.0.1 192.168.2.0/24 192.168.3.0/24
hosts deny = 0.0.0.0/0</PRE
></P
><P
>The above will only allow SMB connections from 'localhost' (your own
computer) and from the two private networks 192.168.2 and
192.168.3. All other connections will be refused connections as soon
as the client sends its first packet. The refusal will be marked as a
'not listening on called name' error.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3119"
>20.3. Using interface protection</A
></H1
><P
>By default Samba will accept connections on any network interface that
it finds on your system. That means if you have a ISDN line or a PPP
connection to the Internet then Samba will accept connections on those
links. This may not be what you want.</P
><P
>You can change this behaviour using options like the following:</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
> interfaces = eth* lo
bind interfaces only = yes</PRE
></P
><P
></P
><P
>This tells Samba to only listen for connections on interfaces with a
name starting with 'eth' such as eth0, eth1, plus on the loopback
interface called 'lo'. The name you will need to use depends on what
OS you are using, in the above I used the common name for Ethernet
adapters on Linux.</P
><P
>If you use the above and someone tries to make a SMB connection to
your host over a PPP interface called 'ppp0' then they will get a TCP
connection refused reply. In that case no Samba code is run at all as
the operating system has been told not to pass connections from that
interface to any process.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3128"
>20.4. Using a firewall</A
></H1
><P
>Many people use a firewall to deny access to services that they don't
want exposed outside their network. This can be a very good idea,
although I would recommend using it in conjunction with the above
methods so that you are protected even if your firewall is not active
for some reason.</P
><P
>If you are setting up a firewall then you need to know what TCP and
UDP ports to allow and block. Samba uses the following:</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>UDP/137 - used by nmbd
UDP/138 - used by nmbd
TCP/139 - used by smbd
TCP/445 - used by smbd</PRE
></P
><P
>The last one is important as many older firewall setups may not be
aware of it, given that this port was only added to the protocol in
recent years. </P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3135"
>20.5. Using a IPC$ share deny</A
></H1
><P
>If the above methods are not suitable, then you could also place a
more specific deny on the IPC$ share that is used in the recently
discovered security hole. This allows you to offer access to other
shares while denying access to IPC$ from potentially untrustworthy
hosts.</P
><P
>To do that you could use:</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
> [ipc$]
hosts allow = 192.168.115.0/24 127.0.0.1
hosts deny = 0.0.0.0/0</PRE
></P
><P
>this would tell Samba that IPC$ connections are not allowed from
anywhere but the two listed places (localhost and a local
subnet). Connections to other shares would still be allowed. As the
IPC$ share is the only share that is always accessible anonymously
this provides some level of protection against attackers that do not
know a username/password for your host.</P
><P
>If you use this method then clients will be given a 'access denied'
reply when they try to access the IPC$ share. That means that those
clients will not be able to browse shares, and may also be unable to
access some other resources. </P
><P
>This is not recommended unless you cannot use one of the other
methods listed above for some reason.</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3144"
>20.6. Upgrading Samba</A
></H1
><P
>Please check regularly on http://www.samba.org/ for updates and
important announcements. Occasionally security releases are made and
it is highly recommended to upgrade Samba when a security vulnerability
is discovered.</P
></DIV
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="NAVFOOTER"
><HR
ALIGN="LEFT"
WIDTH="100%"><TABLE
SUMMARY="Footer navigation table"
WIDTH="100%"
BORDER="0"
CELLPADDING="0"
CELLSPACING="0"
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="groupprofiles.html"
ACCESSKEY="P"
>Prev</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"
ACCESSKEY="H"
>Home</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="appendixes.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
></TR
><TR
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="left"
VALIGN="top"
>Creating Group Prolicy Files</TD
><TD
WIDTH="34%"
ALIGN="center"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="optional.html"
ACCESSKEY="U"
>Up</A
></TD
><TD
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Appendixes</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV
></BODY
></HTML
>

2
docs/htmldocs/securitylevels.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>User and Share security level (for servers not in a domain)</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK

5797
docs/htmldocs/smb.conf.5.html
View File

File diff suppressed because it is too large Load Diff

38
docs/htmldocs/smbcacls.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbcacls</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -134,11 +134,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
><DD
><P
>The owner of a file or directory can be changed
to the name given using the <TT
to the name given using the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-C</I
></TT
>-C</VAR
> option.
The name can be a sid in the form S-1-x-y-z or a name resolved
against the server specified in the first argument. </P
@ -151,11 +149,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><DD
><P
>The group owner of a file or directory can
be changed to the name given using the <TT
be changed to the name given using the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-G</I
></TT
>-G</VAR
>
option. The name can be a sid in the form S-1-x-y-z or a name
resolved against the server specified n the first argument.
@ -198,10 +194,10 @@ NAME="AEN79"
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>
REVISION:&lt;revision number&gt;
OWNER:&lt;sid or name&gt;
GROUP:&lt;sid or name&gt;
ACL:&lt;sid or name&gt;:&lt;type&gt;/&lt;flags&gt;/&lt;mask&gt;</PRE
REVISION:&#60;revision number&#62;
OWNER:&#60;sid or name&#62;
GROUP:&#60;sid or name&#62;
ACL:&#60;sid or name&#62;:&#60;type&#62;/&#60;flags&#62;/&#60;mask&#62;</PRE
></P
><P
>The revision of the ACL specifies the internal Windows
@ -229,30 +225,30 @@ ACL:&lt;sid or name&gt;:&lt;type&gt;/&lt;flags&gt;/&lt;mask&gt;</PRE
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_OBJECT_INHERIT 0x1</TT
>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_OBJECT_INHERIT 0x1</CODE
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_CONTAINER_INHERIT 0x2</TT
>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_CONTAINER_INHERIT 0x2</CODE
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT 0x4</TT
>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_NO_PROPAGATE_INHERIT 0x4</CODE
></P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_INHERIT_ONLY 0x8</TT
>#define SEC_ACE_FLAG_INHERIT_ONLY 0x8</CODE
></P
></LI
></UL

404
docs/htmldocs/smbclient.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbclient</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbclient</B
> {servicename} [password] [-b &lt;buffer size&gt;] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M &lt;netbios name&gt;] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L &lt;netbios name&gt;] [-I destinationIP] [-E] [-c &lt;command string&gt;] [-i scope] [-O &lt;socket options&gt;] [-p port] [-R &lt;name resolve order&gt;] [-s &lt;smb config file&gt;] [-T&lt;c|x&gt;IXFqgbNan] [-k]</P
> {servicename} [password] [-b &#60;buffer size&#62;] [-d debuglevel] [-D Directory] [-U username] [-W workgroup] [-M &#60;netbios name&#62;] [-m maxprotocol] [-A authfile] [-N] [-l logfile] [-L &#60;netbios name&#62;] [-I destinationIP] [-E] [-c &#60;command string&#62;] [-i scope] [-O &#60;socket options&#62;] [-p port] [-R &#60;name resolve order&#62;] [-s &#60;smb config file&#62;] [-T&#60;c|x&#62;IXFqgbNan] [-k]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -94,18 +94,14 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>//server/service</TT
> where <TT
> where <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>server
</I
></TT
</VAR
> is the NetBIOS name of the SMB/CIFS server
offering the desired service and <TT
offering the desired service and <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>service</I
></TT
>service</VAR
>
is the name of the service offered. Thus to connect to
the service "printer" on the SMB/CIFS server "smbserver",
@ -122,11 +118,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
</P
><P
>The server name is looked up according to either
the <TT
the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-R</I
></TT
>-R</VAR
> parameter to <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbclient</B
@ -148,27 +142,21 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
><P
>The password required to access the specified
service on the specified server. If this parameter is
supplied, the <TT
supplied, the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-N</I
></TT
>-N</VAR
> option (suppress
password prompt) is assumed. </P
><P
>There is no default password. If no password is supplied
on the command line (either by using this parameter or adding
a password to the <TT
a password to the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-U</I
></TT
>-U</VAR
> option (see
below)) and the <TT
below)) and the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-N</I
></TT
>-N</VAR
> option is not
specified, the client will prompt for a password, even if
the desired service does not require one. (If no password is
@ -212,7 +200,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
options. </P
></DD
><DT
>-R &lt;name resolve order&gt;</DT
>-R &#60;name resolve order&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>This option is used by the programs in the Samba
@ -227,9 +215,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>lmhosts</TT
>lmhosts</CODE
>: Lookup an IP
address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has
no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see
@ -244,9 +232,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>host</TT
>host</CODE
>: Do a standard host
name to IP address resolution, using the system <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
@ -264,31 +252,27 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>wins</TT
>wins</CODE
>: Query a name with
the IP address listed in the <TT
the IP address listed in the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins server</I
></TT
>wins server</VAR
>
parameter. If no WINS server has
been specified this method will be ignored.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>bcast</TT
>bcast</CODE
>: Do a broadcast on
each of the known local interfaces listed in the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>interfaces</I
></TT
>interfaces</VAR
>
parameter. This is the least reliable of the name resolution
methods as it depends on the target host being on a locally
@ -307,12 +291,10 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
(name resolve order) will be used. </P
><P
>The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast and without
this parameter or any entry in the <TT
this parameter or any entry in the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name resolve order
</I
></TT
</VAR
> parameter of the <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
><SPAN
@ -354,25 +336,19 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>
to the machine FRED. </P
><P
>You may also find the <TT
>You may also find the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-U</I
></TT
>-U</VAR
> and
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-I</I
></TT
>-I</VAR
> options useful, as they allow you to
control the FROM and TO parts of the message. </P
><P
>See the <TT
>See the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>message command</I
></TT
>message command</VAR
> parameter in the <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
><SPAN
@ -441,11 +417,9 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
>-d debuglevel</DT
><DD
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>debuglevel</I
></TT
>debuglevel</VAR
> is an integer from 0 to 10, or
the letter 'A'. </P
><P
@ -463,11 +437,9 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
data, and should only be used when investigating a problem.
Levels above 3 are designed for use only by developers and
generate HUGE amounts of log data, most of which is extremely
cryptic. If <TT
cryptic. If <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>debuglevel</I
></TT
>debuglevel</VAR
> is set to the letter 'A', then <SPAN
CLASS="emphasis"
><I
@ -505,11 +477,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>-l logfilename</DT
><DD
><P
>If specified, <TT
>If specified, <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>logfilename</I
></TT
>logfilename</VAR
> specifies a base filename
into which operational data from the running client will be
logged. </P
@ -536,21 +506,17 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>-I IP-address</DT
><DD
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>IP address</I
></TT
>IP address</VAR
> is the address of the server to connect to.
It should be specified in standard "a.b.c.d" notation. </P
><P
>Normally the client would attempt to locate a named
SMB/CIFS server by looking it up via the NetBIOS name resolution
mechanism described above in the <TT
mechanism described above in the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name resolve order</I
></TT
>name resolve order</VAR
>
parameter above. Using this parameter will force the client
to assume that the server is on the machine with the specified IP
@ -578,19 +544,19 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><P
>Sets the SMB username or username and password.
If %pass is not specified, The user will be prompted. The client
will first check the <TT
will first check the <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>USER</TT
>USER</VAR
> environment variable, then the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>LOGNAME</TT
>LOGNAME</VAR
> variable and if either exists, the
string is uppercased. Anything in these variables following a '%'
sign will be treated as the password. If these environment
variables are not found, the username <TT
variables are not found, the username <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>GUEST</TT
>GUEST</CODE
>
is used. </P
><P
@ -599,9 +565,9 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbclient</B
> will look for
a <TT
a <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>PASSWD</TT
>PASSWD</VAR
> environment variable from which
to read the password. </P
><P
@ -611,17 +577,15 @@ CLASS="ENVAR"
wish to pass the credentials on the command line or via environment
variables. If this method is used, make certain that the permissions
on the file restrict access from unwanted users. See the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-A</I
></TT
>-A</VAR
> for more details. </P
><P
>Be cautious about including passwords in scripts or in
the <TT
the <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>PASSWD</TT
>PASSWD</VAR
> environment variable. Also, on
many systems the command line of a running process may be seen
via the <B
@ -645,9 +609,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>username = &lt;value&gt;
password = &lt;value&gt;
domain = &lt;value&gt;</PRE
>username = &#60;value&#62;
password = &#60;value&#62;
domain = &#60;value&#62;</PRE
></P
><P
>If the domain parameter is missing the current workgroup name
@ -663,12 +627,10 @@ domain = &lt;value&gt;</PRE
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbclient -L
host</B
> and a list should appear. The <TT
> and a list should appear. The <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-I
</I
></TT
</VAR
> option may be useful if your NetBIOS names don't
match your TCP/IP DNS host names or if you are trying to reach a
host on another network. </P
@ -747,39 +709,31 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>c</I
></TT
>c</VAR
> - Create a tar file on UNIX.
Must be followed by the name of a tar file, tape device
or "-" for standard output. If using standard output you must
turn the log level to its lowest value -d0 to avoid corrupting
your tar file. This flag is mutually exclusive with the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>x</I
></TT
>x</VAR
> flag. </P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>x</I
></TT
>x</VAR
> - Extract (restore) a local
tar file back to a share. Unless the -D option is given, the tar
files will be restored from the top level of the share. Must be
followed by the name of the tar file, device or "-" for standard
input. Mutually exclusive with the <TT
input. Mutually exclusive with the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>c</I
></TT
>c</VAR
> flag.
Restored files have their creation times (mtime) set to the
date saved in the tar file. Directories currently do not get
@ -787,11 +741,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>I</I
></TT
>I</VAR
> - Include files and directories.
Is the default behavior when filenames are specified above. Causes
tar files to be included in an extract or create (and therefore
@ -800,28 +752,22 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>X</I
></TT
>X</VAR
> - Exclude files and directories.
Causes tar files to be excluded from an extract or create. See
example below. Filename globbing works in one of two ways now.
See <TT
See <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>r</I
></TT
>r</VAR
> below. </P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>b</I
></TT
>b</VAR
> - Blocksize. Must be followed
by a valid (greater than zero) blocksize. Causes tar file to be
written out in blocksize*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks.
@ -829,38 +775,30 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>g</I
></TT
>g</VAR
> - Incremental. Only back up
files that have the archive bit set. Useful only with the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>c</I
></TT
>c</VAR
> flag. </P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>q</I
></TT
>q</VAR
> - Quiet. Keeps tar from printing
diagnostics as it works. This is the same as tarmode quiet.
</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>r</I
></TT
>r</VAR
> - Regular expression include
or exclude. Uses regular expression matching for
excluding or excluding files if compiled with HAVE_REGEX_H.
@ -870,41 +808,31 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>N</I
></TT
>N</VAR
> - Newer than. Must be followed
by the name of a file whose date is compared against files found
on the share during a create. Only files newer than the file
specified are backed up to the tar file. Useful only with the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>c</I
></TT
>c</VAR
> flag. </P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>a</I
></TT
>a</VAR
> - Set archive bit. Causes the
archive bit to be reset when a file is backed up. Useful with the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>g</I
></TT
> and <TT
>g</VAR
> and <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>c</I
></TT
>c</VAR
> flags.
</P
></LI
@ -1016,16 +944,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><DD
><P
>command string is a semicolon-separated list of
commands to be executed instead of prompting from stdin. <TT
commands to be executed instead of prompting from stdin. <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
> -N</I
></TT
> is implied by <TT
> -N</VAR
> is implied by <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-c</I
></TT
>-c</VAR
>.</P
><P
>This is particularly useful in scripts and for printing stdin
@ -1056,9 +980,9 @@ NAME="AEN336"
>Once the client is running, the user is presented with
a prompt : </P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>smb:\&gt; </TT
>smb:\&#62; </SAMP
></P
><P
>The backslash ("\\") indicates the current working directory
@ -1078,7 +1002,7 @@ CLASS="PROMPT"
><P
>Parameters shown in square brackets (e.g., "[parameter]") are
optional. If not given, the command will use suitable defaults. Parameters
shown in angle brackets (e.g., "&lt;parameter&gt;") are required.
shown in angle brackets (e.g., "&#60;parameter&#62;") are required.
</P
><P
>Note that all commands operating on the server are actually
@ -1096,11 +1020,9 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
>? [command]</DT
><DD
><P
>If <TT
>If <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>command</I
></TT
>command</VAR
> is specified, the ? command will display
a brief informative message about the specified command. If no
command is specified, a list of available commands will
@ -1110,11 +1032,9 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
>! [shell command]</DT
><DD
><P
>If <TT
>If <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>shell command</I
></TT
>shell command</VAR
> is specified, the !
command will execute a shell locally and run the specified shell
command. If no command is specified, a local shell will be run.
@ -1169,27 +1089,23 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
directory on the server will be reported. </P
></DD
><DT
>del &lt;mask&gt;</DT
>del &#60;mask&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>The client will request that the server attempt
to delete all files matching <TT
to delete all files matching <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>mask</I
></TT
>mask</VAR
> from the current working
directory on the server. </P
></DD
><DT
>dir &lt;mask&gt;</DT
>dir &#60;mask&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>A list of the files matching <TT
>A list of the files matching <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>mask</I
></TT
>mask</VAR
> in the current
working directory on the server will be retrieved from the server
and displayed. </P
@ -1202,7 +1118,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
from the program. </P
></DD
><DT
>get &lt;remote file name&gt; [local file name]</DT
>get &#60;remote file name&#62; [local file name]</DT
><DD
><P
>Copy the file called <TT
@ -1230,11 +1146,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>lcd [directory name]</DT
><DD
><P
>If <TT
>If <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>directory name</I
></TT
>directory name</VAR
> is specified, the current
working directory on the local machine will be changed to
the directory specified. This operation will fail if for any
@ -1267,13 +1181,13 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
lowercase filenames are the norm on UNIX systems. </P
></DD
><DT
>ls &lt;mask&gt;</DT
>ls &#60;mask&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>See the dir command above. </P
></DD
><DT
>mask &lt;mask&gt;</DT
>mask &#60;mask&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>This command allows the user to set up a mask
@ -1299,28 +1213,24 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
mask back to "*" after using the mget or mput commands. </P
></DD
><DT
>md &lt;directory name&gt;</DT
>md &#60;directory name&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>See the mkdir command. </P
></DD
><DT
>mget &lt;mask&gt;</DT
>mget &#60;mask&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>Copy all files matching <TT
>Copy all files matching <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>mask</I
></TT
>mask</VAR
> from the server to
the machine running the client. </P
><P
>Note that <TT
>Note that <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>mask</I
></TT
>mask</VAR
> is interpreted differently during recursive
operation and non-recursive operation - refer to the recurse and
mask commands for more information. Note that all transfers in
@ -1330,30 +1240,26 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
> are binary. See also the lowercase command. </P
></DD
><DT
>mkdir &lt;directory name&gt;</DT
>mkdir &#60;directory name&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>Create a new directory on the server (user access
privileges permitting) with the specified name. </P
></DD
><DT
>mput &lt;mask&gt;</DT
>mput &#60;mask&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>Copy all files matching <TT
>Copy all files matching <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>mask</I
></TT
>mask</VAR
> in the current working
directory on the local machine to the current working directory on
the server. </P
><P
>Note that <TT
>Note that <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>mask</I
></TT
>mask</VAR
> is interpreted differently during recursive
operation and non-recursive operation - refer to the recurse and mask
commands for more information. Note that all transfers in <B
@ -1363,7 +1269,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
are binary. </P
></DD
><DT
>print &lt;file name&gt;</DT
>print &#60;file name&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>Print the specified file from the local machine
@ -1372,7 +1278,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>See also the printmode command.</P
></DD
><DT
>printmode &lt;graphics or text&gt;</DT
>printmode &#60;graphics or text&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>Set the print mode to suit either binary data
@ -1392,7 +1298,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
</P
></DD
><DT
>put &lt;local file name&gt; [remote file name]</DT
>put &#60;local file name&#62; [remote file name]</DT
><DD
><P
>Copy the file called <TT
@ -1424,7 +1330,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>See the exit command. </P
></DD
><DT
>rd &lt;directory name&gt;</DT
>rd &#60;directory name&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>See the rmdir command. </P
@ -1449,26 +1355,24 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
using the mask command will be ignored. </P
></DD
><DT
>rm &lt;mask&gt;</DT
>rm &#60;mask&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>Remove all files matching <TT
>Remove all files matching <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>mask</I
></TT
>mask</VAR
> from the current
working directory on the server. </P
></DD
><DT
>rmdir &lt;directory name&gt;</DT
>rmdir &#60;directory name&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>Remove the specified directory (user access
privileges permitting) from the server. </P
></DD
><DT
>setmode &lt;filename&gt; &lt;perm=[+|\-]rsha&gt;</DT
>setmode &#60;filename&#62; &#60;perm=[+|\-]rsha&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>A version of the DOS attrib command to set
@ -1493,15 +1397,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
</P
></DD
><DT
>tar &lt;c|x&gt;[IXbgNa]</DT
>tar &#60;c|x&#62;[IXbgNa]</DT
><DD
><P
>Performs a tar operation - see the <TT
>Performs a tar operation - see the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-T
</I
></TT
</VAR
> command line option above. Behavior may be affected
by the tarmode command (see below). Using g (incremental) and N
(newer) will affect tarmode settings. Note that using the "-" option
@ -1509,20 +1411,18 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
</P
></DD
><DT
>blocksize &lt;blocksize&gt;</DT
>blocksize &#60;blocksize&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>Blocksize. Must be followed by a valid (greater
than zero) blocksize. Causes tar file to be written out in
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>blocksize</I
></TT
>blocksize</VAR
>*TBLOCK (usually 512 byte) blocks. </P
></DD
><DT
>tarmode &lt;full|inc|reset|noreset&gt;</DT
>tarmode &#60;full|inc|reset|noreset&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>Changes tar's behavior with regard to archive
@ -1564,25 +1464,25 @@ NAME="AEN532"
><H2
>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</H2
><P
>The variable <TT
>The variable <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>USER</TT
>USER</VAR
> may contain the
username of the person using the client. This information is
used only if the protocol level is high enough to support
session-level passwords.</P
><P
>The variable <TT
>The variable <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>PASSWD</TT
>PASSWD</VAR
> may contain
the password of the person using the client. This information is
used only if the protocol level is high enough to support
session-level passwords. </P
><P
>The variable <TT
>The variable <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>LIBSMB_PROG</TT
>LIBSMB_PROG</VAR
> may contain
the path, executed with system(), which the client should connect
to instead of connecting to a server. This functionality is primarily

102
docs/htmldocs/smbcontrol.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbcontrol</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -109,31 +109,23 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
>destination</DT
><DD
><P
>One of <TT
>One of <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nmbd</I
></TT
>, <TT
>nmbd</VAR
>, <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>smbd</I
></TT
>smbd</VAR
> or a process ID.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>smbd</I
></TT
>smbd</VAR
> destination causes the
message to "broadcast" to all smbd daemons.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nmbd</I
></TT
>nmbd</VAR
> destination causes the
message to be sent to the nmbd daemon specified in the
<TT
@ -148,39 +140,39 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>message-type</DT
><DD
><P
>One of: <TT
>One of: <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>close-share</TT
>close-share</CODE
>,
<TT
<CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>debug</TT
>debug</CODE
>,
<TT
<CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>force-election</TT
>, <TT
>force-election</CODE
>, <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ping
</TT
>, <TT
</CODE
>, <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>profile</TT
>, <TT
>profile</CODE
>, <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
> debuglevel</TT
>, <TT
> debuglevel</CODE
>, <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>profilelevel</TT
>profilelevel</CODE
>,
or <TT
or <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>printnotify</TT
>printnotify</CODE
>.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>close-share</TT
>close-share</CODE
> message-type sends a
message to smbd which will then close the client connections to
the named share. Note that this doesn't affect client connections
@ -188,25 +180,25 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
share name for which client connections will be closed, or the
"*" character which will close all currently open shares.
This may be useful if you made changes to the access controls on the share.
This message can only be sent to <TT
This message can only be sent to <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>smbd</TT
>smbd</CODE
>.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>debug</TT
>debug</CODE
> message-type allows
the debug level to be set to the value specified by the
parameter. This can be sent to any of the destinations.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>force-election</TT
>force-election</CODE
> message-type can only be
sent to the <TT
sent to the <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>nmbd</TT
>nmbd</CODE
> destination. This message
causes the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -214,17 +206,17 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
> daemon to force a new browse
master election.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>ping</TT
>ping</CODE
> message-type sends the
number of "ping" messages specified by the parameter and waits
for the same number of reply "pong" messages. This can be sent to
any of the destinations.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>profile</TT
>profile</CODE
> message-type sends a
message to an smbd to change the profile settings based on the
parameter. The parameter can be "on" to turn on profile stats
@ -233,25 +225,25 @@ CLASS="CONSTANT"
disabled), and "flush" to zero the current profile stats. This can
be sent to any smbd or nmbd destinations.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>debuglevel</TT
>debuglevel</CODE
> message-type sends
a "request debug level" message. The current debug level setting
is returned by a "debuglevel" message. This can be
sent to any of the destinations.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>profilelevel</TT
>profilelevel</CODE
> message-type sends
a "request profile level" message. The current profile level
setting is returned by a "profilelevel" message. This can be sent
to any smbd or nmbd destinations.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>printnotify</TT
>printnotify</CODE
> message-type sends a
message to smbd which in turn sends a printer notify message to
any Windows NT clients connected to a printer. This message-type
@ -308,9 +300,9 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
event has occured. It doesn't actually cause the
event to happen.
This message can only be sent to <TT
This message can only be sent to <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>smbd</TT
>smbd</CODE
>.
</P
></DD

64
docs/htmldocs/smbd.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbd</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbd</B
> [-D] [-F] [-S] [-i] [-h] [-V] [-b] [-d &lt;debug level&gt;] [-l &lt;log directory&gt;] [-p &lt;port number&gt;] [-O &lt;socket option&gt;] [-s &lt;configuration file&gt;]</P
> [-D] [-F] [-S] [-i] [-h] [-V] [-b] [-d &#60;debug level&#62;] [-l &#60;log directory&#62;] [-p &#60;port number&#62;] [-O &#60;socket option&#62;] [-s &#60;configuration file&#62;]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -227,14 +227,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
Samba was built.</P
></DD
><DT
>-d &lt;debug level&gt;</DT
>-d &#60;debug level&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>debuglevel</I
></TT
>debuglevel</VAR
> is an integer
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
not specified is zero.</P
@ -256,12 +254,10 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
override the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#loglevel"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>log
level</I
></TT
level</VAR
></A
> parameter in the <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
@ -272,15 +268,13 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
> file.</P
></DD
><DT
>-l &lt;log directory&gt;</DT
>-l &#60;log directory&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>If specified,
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>log directory</I
></TT
>log directory</VAR
>
specifies a log directory into which the "log.smbd" log
file will be created for informational and debug
@ -289,11 +283,9 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
its size may be controlled by the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#maxlogsize"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>max log size</I
></TT
>max log size</VAR
></A
>
option in the <SPAN
@ -320,17 +312,15 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
compile time.</P
></DD
><DT
>-O &lt;socket options&gt;</DT
>-O &#60;socket options&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>See the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#socketoptions"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>socket options</I
></TT
>socket options</VAR
></A
>
parameter in the <SPAN
@ -342,14 +332,12 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
> file for details.</P
></DD
><DT
>-p &lt;port number&gt;</DT
>-p &#60;port number&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>port number</I
></TT
>port number</VAR
> is a positive integer
value. The default value if this parameter is not
specified is 139.</P
@ -373,7 +361,7 @@ CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
in the above situation.</P
></DD
><DT
>-s &lt;configuration file&gt;</DT
>-s &#60;configuration file&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>The file specified contains the
@ -534,17 +522,17 @@ NAME="AEN177"
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
><DL
><DT
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>PRINTER</TT
>PRINTER</VAR
></DT
><DD
><P
>If no printer name is specified to
printable services, most systems will use the value of
this variable (or <TT
this variable (or <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>lp</TT
>lp</CODE
> if this variable is
not defined) as the name of the printer to use. This
is not specific to the server, however.</P
@ -566,12 +554,10 @@ NAME="AEN186"
by the limitations of the SMB protocol and the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#OBEYPAMRESRICTIONS"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>obey
pam restricions</I
></TT
pam restricions</VAR
></A
> <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"

22
docs/htmldocs/smbgroupedit.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbgroupedit</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -179,9 +179,9 @@ TYPE="1"
<TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/group</TT
>), let's call it <TT
>), let's call it <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>domadm</TT
>domadm</CODE
>.
</P
></LI
@ -210,9 +210,9 @@ TYPE="a"
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
>root# </SAMP
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbgroupedit -vs | grep "Domain Admins"</B
@ -226,9 +226,9 @@ Domain Admins (S-1-5-21-1108995562-3116817432-1375597819-512) -&#62; -1</PRE
"Domain Admins" group, by running the command:
<PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
>root# </SAMP
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbgroupedit \
@ -254,9 +254,9 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
>To verify that your mapping has taken effect:
<PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
>root# </SAMP
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbgroupedit -vs|grep "Domain Admins"</B
@ -269,9 +269,9 @@ NT/W2K or a samba server running winbind) to some users who are member
of a group on your samba PDC, flag that group as a domain group:
<PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root# </TT
>root# </SAMP
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbgroupedit -a unixgroup -td</B

4
docs/htmldocs/smbmnt.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbmnt</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbmnt</B
> {mount-point} [-s &lt;share&gt;] [-r] [-u &lt;uid&gt;] [-g &lt;gid&gt;] [-f &lt;mask&gt;] [-d &lt;mask&gt;] [-o &lt;options&gt;]</P
> {mount-point} [-s &#60;share&#62;] [-r] [-u &#60;uid&#62;] [-g &#60;gid&#62;] [-f &#60;mask&#62;] [-d &#60;mask&#62;] [-o &#60;options&#62;]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"

66
docs/htmldocs/smbmount.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbmount</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -124,27 +124,27 @@ NAME="AEN35"
CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
><DL
><DT
>username=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>username=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>specifies the username to connect as. If
this is not given, then the environment variable <TT
this is not given, then the environment variable <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
> USER</TT
> USER</VAR
> is used. This option can also take the
form "user%password" or "user/workgroup" or
"user/workgroup%password" to allow the password and workgroup
to be specified as part of the username.</P
></DD
><DT
>password=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>password=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>specifies the SMB password. If this
option is not given then the environment variable
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>PASSWD</TT
>PASSWD</VAR
> is used. If it can find
no password <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -161,15 +161,15 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
</P
></DD
><DT
>credentials=&lt;filename&gt;</DT
>credentials=&#60;filename&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>specifies a file that contains a username and/or password.
The format of the file is:
<PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>username = &lt;value&gt;
password = &lt;value&gt;</PRE
>username = &#60;value&#62;
password = &#60;value&#62;</PRE
></P
><P
>This is preferred over having passwords in plaintext in a
@ -181,14 +181,14 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
</P
></DD
><DT
>netbiosname=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>netbiosname=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets the source NetBIOS name. It defaults
to the local hostname. </P
></DD
><DT
>uid=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>uid=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets the uid that will own all files on
@ -197,7 +197,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
</P
></DD
><DT
>gid=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>gid=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets the gid that will own all files on
@ -206,14 +206,14 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
gid. </P
></DD
><DT
>port=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>port=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets the remote SMB port number. The default
is 139. </P
></DD
><DT
>fmask=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>fmask=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets the file mask. This determines the
@ -221,7 +221,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
The default is based on the current umask. </P
></DD
><DT
>dmask=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>dmask=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets the directory mask. This determines the
@ -229,7 +229,7 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
The default is based on the current umask. </P
></DD
><DT
>debug=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>debug=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets the debug level. This is useful for
@ -238,20 +238,20 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
output, possibly hiding the useful output.</P
></DD
><DT
>ip=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>ip=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets the destination host or IP address.
</P
></DD
><DT
>workgroup=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>workgroup=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets the workgroup on the destination </P
></DD
><DT
>sockopt=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>sockopt=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets the TCP socket options. See the <A
@ -264,16 +264,14 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>smb.conf</SPAN
>(5)</SPAN
></A
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>socket options</I
></TT
>socket options</VAR
> option.
</P
></DD
><DT
>scope=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>scope=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets the NetBIOS scope </P
@ -297,7 +295,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
>mount read-write </P
></DD
><DT
>iocharset=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>iocharset=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
> sets the charset used by the Linux side for codepage
@ -307,7 +305,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
</P
></DD
><DT
>codepage=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>codepage=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
> sets the codepage the server uses. See the iocharset
@ -316,7 +314,7 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
</P
></DD
><DT
>ttl=&lt;arg&gt;</DT
>ttl=&#60;arg&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
> sets how long a directory listing is cached in milliseconds
@ -341,26 +339,26 @@ NAME="AEN130"
><H2
>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</H2
><P
>The variable <TT
>The variable <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>USER</TT
>USER</VAR
> may contain the username of the
person using the client. This information is used only if the
protocol level is high enough to support session-level
passwords. The variable can be used to set both username and
password by using the format username%password.</P
><P
>The variable <TT
>The variable <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>PASSWD</TT
>PASSWD</VAR
> may contain the password of the
person using the client. This information is used only if the
protocol level is high enough to support session-level
passwords.</P
><P
>The variable <TT
>The variable <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>PASSWD_FILE</TT
>PASSWD_FILE</VAR
> may contain the pathname
of a file to read the password from. A single line of input is
read and used as the password.</P

12
docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.5.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbpasswd</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -115,9 +115,9 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
null password this field will contain the characters "NO PASSWORD"
as the start of the hex string. If the hex string is equal to
32 'X' characters then the user's account is marked as
<TT
<CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>disabled</TT
>disabled</CODE
> and the user will not be able to
log onto the Samba server. </P
><P
@ -235,11 +235,9 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
> - This means the
account has no password (the passwords in the fields LANMAN
Password Hash and NT Password Hash are ignored). Note that this
will only allow users to log on with no password if the <TT
will only allow users to log on with no password if the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
> null passwords</I
></TT
> null passwords</VAR
> parameter is set in the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#NULLPASSWORDS"
TARGET="_top"

120
docs/htmldocs/smbpasswd.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbpasswd</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbpasswd</B
> [-a] [-x] [-d] [-e] [-D debuglevel] [-n] [-r &lt;remote machine&gt;] [-R &lt;name resolve order&gt;] [-m] [-U username[%password]] [-h] [-s] [-w pass] [-i] [-L] [username]</P
> [-a] [-x] [-d] [-e] [-D debuglevel] [-n] [-r &#60;remote machine&#62;] [-R &#60;name resolve order&#62;] [-m] [-U username[%password]] [-h] [-s] [-w pass] [-i] [-L] [username]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -107,20 +107,16 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
was typed correctly. No passwords will be echoed on the screen
whilst being typed. If you have a blank SMB password (specified by
the string "NO PASSWORD" in the smbpasswd file) then just press
the &lt;Enter&gt; key when asked for your old password. </P
the &#60;Enter&#62; key when asked for your old password. </P
><P
>smbpasswd can also be used by a normal user to change their
SMB password on remote machines, such as Windows NT Primary Domain
Controllers. See the (<TT
Controllers. See the (<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-r</I
></TT
>) and <TT
>-r</VAR
>) and <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-U</I
></TT
>-U</VAR
> options
below. </P
><P
@ -151,7 +147,7 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
><P
>This option specifies that the username
following should be added to the local smbpasswd file, with the
new password typed (type &lt;Enter&gt; for the old password). This
new password typed (type &#60;Enter&#62; for the old password). This
option is ignored if the username following already exists in
the smbpasswd file and it is treated like a regular change
password command. Note that the default passdb backends require
@ -181,13 +177,13 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
><DD
><P
>This option specifies that the username following
should be <TT
should be <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>disabled</TT
>disabled</CODE
> in the local smbpasswd
file. This is done by writing a <TT
file. This is done by writing a <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>'D'</TT
>'D'</CODE
> flag
into the account control space in the smbpasswd file. Once this
is done all attempts to authenticate via SMB using this username
@ -212,9 +208,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
><DD
><P
>This option specifies that the username following
should be <TT
should be <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>enabled</TT
>enabled</CODE
> in the local smbpasswd file,
if the account was previously disabled. If the account was not
disabled this option has no effect. Once the account is enabled then
@ -240,11 +236,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>-D debuglevel</DT
><DD
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>debuglevel</I
></TT
>debuglevel</VAR
> is an integer
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is not specified
is zero. </P
@ -291,30 +285,24 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
>This option allows a user to specify what machine
they wish to change their password on. Without this parameter
smbpasswd defaults to the local host. The <TT
smbpasswd defaults to the local host. The <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>remote
machine name</I
></TT
machine name</VAR
> is the NetBIOS name of the SMB/CIFS
server to contact to attempt the password change. This name is
resolved into an IP address using the standard name resolution
mechanism in all programs of the Samba suite. See the <TT
mechanism in all programs of the Samba suite. See the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-R
name resolve order</I
></TT
name resolve order</VAR
> parameter for details on changing
this resolving mechanism. </P
><P
>The username whose password is changed is that of the
current UNIX logged on user. See the <TT
current UNIX logged on user. See the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-U username</I
></TT
>-U username</VAR
>
parameter for details on changing the password for a different
username. </P
@ -350,9 +338,9 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>lmhosts</TT
>lmhosts</CODE
>: Lookup an IP
address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the line in lmhosts has
no name type attached to the NetBIOS name (see the <SPAN
@ -366,9 +354,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>host</TT
>host</CODE
>: Do a standard host
name to IP address resolution, using the system <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
@ -386,31 +374,27 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>wins</TT
>wins</CODE
>: Query a name with
the IP address listed in the <TT
the IP address listed in the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins server</I
></TT
>wins server</VAR
>
parameter. If no WINS server has been specified this method
will be ignored.</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>bcast</TT
>bcast</CODE
>: Do a broadcast on
each of the known local interfaces listed in the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>interfaces</I
></TT
>interfaces</VAR
> parameter. This is the least
reliable of the name resolution methods as it depends on the
target host being on a locally connected subnet.</P
@ -446,11 +430,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
><DD
><P
>This option may only be used in conjunction
with the <TT
with the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-r</I
></TT
>-r</VAR
> option. When changing
a password on a remote machine it allows the user to specify
the user name on that machine whose password will be changed. It
@ -492,34 +474,28 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>--with-ldapsam</B
> option. The <TT
> option. The <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-w</I
></TT
>-w</VAR
>
switch is used to specify the password to be used with the
<A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#LDAPADMINDN"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap admin
dn</I
></TT
dn</VAR
></A
>. Note that the password is stored in
the <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>secrets.tdb</TT
> and is keyed off
of the admin's DN. This means that if the value of <TT
of the admin's DN. This means that if the value of <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ldap
admin dn</I
></TT
admin dn</VAR
> ever changes, the password will need to be
manually updated as well.
</P
@ -578,17 +554,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
is to add a restriction to the hosts that may access the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
> smbd</B
> running on the local machine by specifying either <TT
> running on the local machine by specifying either <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>allow
hosts</I
></TT
> or <TT
hosts</VAR
> or <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>deny hosts</I
></TT
>deny hosts</VAR
> entry in
the <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"

92
docs/htmldocs/smbsh.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbsh</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbsh</B
> [-W workgroup] [-U username] [-P prefix] [-R &lt;name resolve order&gt;] [-d &lt;debug level&gt;] [-l logfile] [-L libdir]</P
> [-W workgroup] [-U username] [-P prefix] [-R &#60;name resolve order&#62;] [-d &#60;debug level&#62;] [-l logfile] [-L libdir]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -130,7 +130,7 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
</P
></DD
><DT
>-R &lt;name resolve order&gt;</DT
>-R &#60;name resolve order&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>This option is used to determine what naming
@ -145,9 +145,9 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
><UL
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>lmhosts</TT
>lmhosts</CODE
>:
Lookup an IP address in the Samba lmhosts file. If the
line in lmhosts has no name type attached to the
@ -164,9 +164,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>host</TT
>host</CODE
>:
Do a standard host name to IP address resolution, using
the system <TT
@ -186,16 +186,14 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>wins</TT
>wins</CODE
>:
Query a name with the IP address listed in the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>wins server</I
></TT
>wins server</VAR
> parameter. If no
WINS server has been specified this method will be
ignored.
@ -203,16 +201,14 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
></LI
><LI
><P
><TT
><CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>bcast</TT
>bcast</CODE
>:
Do a broadcast on each of the known local interfaces
listed in the <TT
listed in the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>interfaces</I
></TT
>interfaces</VAR
>
parameter. This is the least reliable of the name
resolution methods as it depends on the target host
@ -229,20 +225,16 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>smb.conf</SPAN
>(5)</SPAN
> file parameter
(<TT
(<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name resolve order</I
></TT
>name resolve order</VAR
>) will be used. </P
><P
>The default order is lmhosts, host, wins, bcast. Without
this parameter or any entry in the <TT
this parameter or any entry in the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name resolve order
</I
></TT
</VAR
> parameter of the <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
><SPAN
@ -253,7 +245,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
will be attempted in this order. </P
></DD
><DT
>-d &lt;debug level&gt;</DT
>-d &#60;debug level&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>debug level is an integer from 0 to 10.</P
@ -277,18 +269,14 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
><DD
><P
>If specified causes all debug messages to be
written to the file specified by <TT
written to the file specified by <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>logfilename
</I
></TT
</VAR
>. If not specified then all messages will be
written to<TT
written to<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>stderr</I
></TT
>stderr</VAR
>.
</P
></DD
@ -326,32 +314,26 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
operating system.
<PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>system% </TT
><TT
>system% </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>smbsh</B
></TT
>smbsh</KBD
>
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>Username: </TT
><TT
>Username: </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>user</B
></TT
>user</KBD
>
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>Password: </TT
><TT
>Password: </SAMP
><KBD
CLASS="USERINPUT"
><B
>XXXXXXX</B
></TT
>XXXXXXX</KBD
></PRE
></P
><P
@ -372,7 +354,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
the workgroup MYGROUP. The command
<B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ls /smb/MYGROUP/&lt;machine-name&gt;</B
>ls /smb/MYGROUP/&#60;machine-name&#62;</B
> will show the share
names for that machine. You could then, for example, use the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"

10
docs/htmldocs/smbspool.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbspool</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -94,9 +94,9 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
></UL
><P
>smbspool tries to get the URI from argv[0]. If argv[0]
contains the name of the program then it looks in the <TT
contains the name of the program then it looks in the <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
> DEVICE_URI</TT
> DEVICE_URI</VAR
> environment variable.</P
><P
>Programs using the <B
@ -104,9 +104,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>exec(2)</B
> functions can
pass the URI in argv[0], while shell scripts must set the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
>DEVICE_URI</TT
>DEVICE_URI</VAR
> environment variable prior to
running smbspool.</P
></DIV

16
docs/htmldocs/smbstatus.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbstatus</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>smbstatus</B
> [-P] [-b] [-d &lt;debug level&gt;] [-v] [-L] [-B] [-p] [-S] [-s &lt;configuration file&gt;] [-u &lt;username&gt;]</P
> [-P] [-b] [-d &#60;debug level&#62;] [-v] [-L] [-B] [-p] [-S] [-s &#60;configuration file&#62;] [-u &#60;username&#62;]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
>gives brief output.</P
></DD
><DT
>-d|--debug=&lt;debuglevel&gt;</DT
>-d|--debug=&#60;debuglevel&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>sets debugging to specified level</P
@ -132,7 +132,7 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>causes smbstatus to only list shares.</P
></DD
><DT
>-s|--conf=&lt;configuration file&gt;</DT
>-s|--conf=&#60;configuration file&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>The default configuration file name is
@ -146,15 +146,13 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
> for more information.</P
></DD
><DT
>-u|--user=&lt;username&gt;</DT
>-u|--user=&#60;username&#62;</DT
><DD
><P
>selects information relevant to
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>username</I
></TT
>username</VAR
> only.</P
></DD
></DL

26
docs/htmldocs/smbtar.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbtar</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -105,12 +105,10 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
>-d directory</DT
><DD
><P
>Change to initial <TT
>Change to initial <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory
</I
></TT
</VAR
> before restoring / backing up files. </P
></DD
><DT
@ -138,11 +136,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><DD
><P
>Tape device. May be regular file or tape
device. Default: <TT
device. Default: <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>$TAPE</I
></TT
>$TAPE</VAR
> environmental
variable; if not set, a file called <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
@ -188,11 +184,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><DD
><P
>Log (debug) level. Corresponds to the
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-d</I
></TT
>-d</VAR
> flag of <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
><SPAN
@ -212,11 +206,9 @@ NAME="AEN100"
><H2
>ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES</H2
><P
>The <TT
>The <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>$TAPE</I
></TT
>$TAPE</VAR
> variable specifies the
default tape device to write to. May be overridden
with the -t option. </P

2
docs/htmldocs/smbumount.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>smbumount</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"

68
docs/htmldocs/speed.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Samba performance issues</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO"
HREF="groupmapping.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Creating Group Profiles"
TITLE="Creating Group Prolicy Files"
HREF="groupprofiles.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
@ -74,15 +74,15 @@ CLASS="CHAPTER"
><A
NAME="SPEED"
></A
>Chapter 19. Samba performance issues</H1
>Chapter 18. Samba performance issues</H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3033"
></A
>19.1. Comparisons</H1
NAME="AEN2890"
>18.1. Comparisons</A
></H1
><P
>The Samba server uses TCP to talk to the client. Thus if you are
trying to see if it performs well you should really compare it to
@ -111,9 +111,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3039"
></A
>19.2. Socket options</H1
NAME="AEN2896"
>18.2. Socket options</A
></H1
><P
>There are a number of socket options that can greatly affect the
performance of a TCP based server like Samba.</P
@ -139,9 +139,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3046"
></A
>19.3. Read size</H1
NAME="AEN2903"
>18.3. Read size</A
></H1
><P
>The option "read size" affects the overlap of disk reads/writes with
network reads/writes. If the amount of data being transferred in
@ -165,9 +165,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3051"
></A
>19.4. Max xmit</H1
NAME="AEN2908"
>18.4. Max xmit</A
></H1
><P
>At startup the client and server negotiate a "maximum transmit" size,
which limits the size of nearly all SMB commands. You can set the
@ -188,9 +188,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3056"
></A
>19.5. Log level</H1
NAME="AEN2913"
>18.5. Log level</A
></H1
><P
>If you set the log level (also known as "debug level") higher than 2
then you may suffer a large drop in performance. This is because the
@ -202,9 +202,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3059"
></A
>19.6. Read raw</H1
NAME="AEN2916"
>18.6. Read raw</A
></H1
><P
>The "read raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency
file read operation. A server may choose to not support it,
@ -224,9 +224,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3064"
></A
>19.7. Write raw</H1
NAME="AEN2921"
>18.7. Write raw</A
></H1
><P
>The "write raw" operation is designed to be an optimised, low-latency
file write operation. A server may choose to not support it,
@ -241,9 +241,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3068"
></A
>19.8. Slow Clients</H1
NAME="AEN2925"
>18.8. Slow Clients</A
></H1
><P
>One person has reported that setting the protocol to COREPLUS rather
than LANMAN2 gave a dramatic speed improvement (from 10k/s to 150k/s).</P
@ -258,9 +258,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3072"
></A
>19.9. Slow Logins</H1
NAME="AEN2929"
>18.9. Slow Logins</A
></H1
><P
>Slow logins are almost always due to the password checking time. Using
the lowest practical "password level" will improve things a lot. You
@ -271,9 +271,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN3075"
></A
>19.10. Client tuning</H1
NAME="AEN2932"
>18.10. Client tuning</A
></H1
><P
>Often a speed problem can be traced to the client. The client (for
example Windows for Workgroups) can often be tuned for better TCP
@ -431,7 +431,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Creating Group Profiles</TD
>Creating Group Prolicy Files</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV

16
docs/htmldocs/swat.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>swat</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>swat</B
> [-s &lt;smb config file&gt;] [-a]</P
> [-s &#60;smb config file&#62;] [-a]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -350,17 +350,13 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>smb.conf</SPAN
>(5)</SPAN
> file. It will rearrange the entries and delete all
comments, <TT
comments, <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>include=</I
></TT
> and <TT
>include=</VAR
> and <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>copy=
</I
></TT
</VAR
> options. If you have a carefully crafted <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
> smb.conf</TT

22
docs/htmldocs/testparm.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>testparm</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>testparm</B
> [-s] [-h] [-v] [-L &lt;servername&gt;] [-t &lt;encoding&gt;] {config filename} [hostname hostIP]</P
> [-s] [-h] [-v] [-L &#60;servername&#62;] [-t &#60;encoding&#62;] {config filename} [hostname hostIP]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -135,11 +135,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>-L servername</DT
><DD
><P
>Sets the value of the %L macro to <TT
>Sets the value of the %L macro to <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>servername</I
></TT
>servername</VAR
>.
This is useful for testing include files specified with the
%L macro. </P
@ -187,17 +185,13 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
specified, then <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>testparm</B
> will examine the <TT
> will examine the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts
allow</I
></TT
> and <TT
allow</VAR
> and <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>hosts deny</I
></TT
>hosts deny</VAR
>
parameters in the <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"

6
docs/htmldocs/testprns.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>testprns</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -167,11 +167,11 @@ NAME="AEN53"
>DIAGNOSTICS</H2
><P
>If a printer is found to be valid, the message
"Printer name &lt;printername&gt; is valid" will be
"Printer name &#60;printername&#62; is valid" will be
displayed. </P
><P
>If a printer is found to be invalid, the message
"Printer name &lt;printername&gt; is not valid" will be
"Printer name &#60;printername&#62; is not valid" will be
displayed. </P
><P
>All messages that would normally be logged during

76
docs/htmldocs/type.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Type of installation</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -78,7 +78,7 @@ CLASS="TITLE"
><DIV
CLASS="PARTINTRO"
><A
NAME="AEN678"
NAME="AEN581"
></A
><H1
>Introduction</H1
@ -107,22 +107,22 @@ HREF="samba-pdc.html"
><DL
><DT
>5.1. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN722"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN625"
>Prerequisite Reading</A
></DT
><DT
>5.2. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN728"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN631"
>Background</A
></DT
><DT
>5.3. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN767"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN670"
>Configuring the Samba Domain Controller</A
></DT
><DT
>5.4. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN810"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN713"
>Creating Machine Trust Accounts and Joining Clients to the
Domain</A
></DT
@ -130,59 +130,59 @@ Domain</A
><DL
><DT
>5.4.1. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN829"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN732"
>Manual Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A
></DT
><DT
>5.4.2. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN870"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN773"
>"On-the-Fly" Creation of Machine Trust Accounts</A
></DT
><DT
>5.4.3. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN879"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN782"
>Joining the Client to the Domain</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>5.5. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN894"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN797"
>Common Problems and Errors</A
></DT
><DT
>5.6. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN942"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN845"
>System Policies and Profiles</A
></DT
><DT
>5.7. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN986"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN889"
>What other help can I get?</A
></DT
><DT
>5.8. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1100"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1003"
>Domain Control for Windows 9x/ME</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>5.8.1. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1126"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1029"
>Configuration Instructions: Network Logons</A
></DT
><DT
>5.8.2. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1145"
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1048"
>Configuration Instructions: Setting up Roaming User Profiles</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>5.9. <A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1238"
>DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control &amp; Samba</A
HREF="samba-pdc.html#AEN1141"
>DOMAIN_CONTROL.txt : Windows NT Domain Control &#38; Samba</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
@ -195,53 +195,53 @@ HREF="samba-bdc.html"
><DL
><DT
>6.1. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1274"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1177"
>Prerequisite Reading</A
></DT
><DT
>6.2. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1278"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1181"
>Background</A
></DT
><DT
>6.3. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1286"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1189"
>What qualifies a Domain Controller on the network?</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>6.3.1. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1289"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1192"
>How does a Workstation find its domain controller?</A
></DT
><DT
>6.3.2. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1292"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1195"
>When is the PDC needed?</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>6.4. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1295"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1198"
>Can Samba be a Backup Domain Controller to an NT PDC?</A
></DT
><DT
>6.5. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1300"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1203"
>How do I set up a Samba BDC?</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>6.5.1. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1317"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1220"
>How do I replicate the smbpasswd file?</A
></DT
><DT
>6.5.2. <A
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1321"
HREF="samba-bdc.html#AEN1224"
>Can I do this all with LDAP?</A
></DT
></DL
@ -257,51 +257,51 @@ HREF="ads.html"
><DL
><DT
>7.1. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1339"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1242"
>Installing the required packages for Debian</A
></DT
><DT
>7.2. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1346"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1249"
>Installing the required packages for RedHat</A
></DT
><DT
>7.3. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1356"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1259"
>Compile Samba</A
></DT
><DT
>7.4. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1371"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1274"
>Setup your /etc/krb5.conf</A
></DT
><DT
>7.5. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1381"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1284"
>Create the computer account</A
></DT
><DD
><DL
><DT
>7.5.1. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1385"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1288"
>Possible errors</A
></DT
></DL
></DD
><DT
>7.6. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1393"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1296"
>Test your server setup</A
></DT
><DT
>7.7. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1398"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1301"
>Testing with smbclient</A
></DT
><DT
>7.8. <A
HREF="ads.html#AEN1401"
HREF="ads.html#AEN1304"
>Notes</A
></DT
></DL
@ -315,17 +315,17 @@ HREF="domain-security.html"
><DL
><DT
>8.1. <A
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1423"
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1326"
>Joining an NT Domain with Samba 3.0</A
></DT
><DT
>8.2. <A
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1478"
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1381"
>Samba and Windows 2000 Domains</A
></DT
><DT
>8.3. <A
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1481"
HREF="domain-security.html#AEN1384"
>Why is this better than security = server?</A
></DT
></DL

290
docs/htmldocs/unix-permissions.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>UNIX Permission Bits and Windows NT Access Control Lists</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -81,10 +81,10 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1744"
></A
NAME="AEN1647"
>10.1. Viewing and changing UNIX permissions using the NT
security dialogs</H1
security dialogs</A
></H1
><P
>New in the Samba 2.0.4 release is the ability for Windows
NT clients to use their native security settings dialog box to
@ -100,9 +100,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1748"
></A
>10.2. How to view file security on a Samba share</H1
NAME="AEN1651"
>10.2. How to view file security on a Samba share</A
></H1
><P
>From an NT 4.0 client, single-click with the right
mouse button on any file or directory in a Samba mounted
@ -170,9 +170,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1759"
></A
>10.3. Viewing file ownership</H1
NAME="AEN1662"
>10.3. Viewing file ownership</A
></H1
><P
>Clicking on the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -186,23 +186,17 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B
></P
><P
>Where <TT
>Where <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>SERVER</I
></TT
>SERVER</VAR
> is the NetBIOS name of
the Samba server, <TT
the Samba server, <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>user</I
></TT
>user</VAR
> is the user name of
the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT
the UNIX user who owns the file, and <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>(Long name)</I
></TT
>(Long name)</VAR
>
is the descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the
GECOS field of the UNIX password database). Click on the <B
@ -211,15 +205,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
</B
> button to remove this dialog.</P
><P
>If the parameter <TT
>If the parameter <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nt acl support</I
></TT
>nt acl support</VAR
>
is set to <TT
is set to <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>false</TT
>false</CODE
> then the file owner will
be shown as the NT user <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -264,9 +256,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1779"
></A
>10.4. Viewing file or directory permissions</H1
NAME="AEN1682"
>10.4. Viewing file or directory permissions</A
></H1
><P
>The third button is the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -281,36 +273,28 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>"SERVER\user (Long name)"</B
></P
><P
>Where <TT
>Where <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>SERVER</I
></TT
>SERVER</VAR
> is the NetBIOS name of
the Samba server, <TT
the Samba server, <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>user</I
></TT
>user</VAR
> is the user name of
the UNIX user who owns the file, and <TT
the UNIX user who owns the file, and <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>(Long name)</I
></TT
>(Long name)</VAR
>
is the descriptive string identifying the user (normally found in the
GECOS field of the UNIX password database).</P
><P
>If the parameter <TT
>If the parameter <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nt acl support</I
></TT
>nt acl support</VAR
>
is set to <TT
is set to <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>false</TT
>false</CODE
> then the file owner will
be shown as the NT user <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -326,9 +310,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1794"
></A
>10.4.1. File Permissions</H2
NAME="AEN1697"
>10.4.1. File Permissions</A
></H2
><P
>The standard UNIX user/group/world triple and
the corresponding "read", "write", "execute" permissions
@ -388,9 +372,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN1808"
></A
>10.4.2. Directory Permissions</H2
NAME="AEN1711"
>10.4.2. Directory Permissions</A
></H2
><P
>Directories on an NT NTFS file system have two
different sets of permissions. The first set of permissions
@ -420,9 +404,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1815"
></A
>10.5. Modifying file or directory permissions</H1
NAME="AEN1718"
>10.5. Modifying file or directory permissions</A
></H1
><P
>Modifying file and directory permissions is as simple
as changing the displayed permissions in the dialog box, and
@ -434,15 +418,13 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
with the standard Samba permission masks and mapping of DOS
attributes that need to also be taken into account.</P
><P
>If the parameter <TT
>If the parameter <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>nt acl support</I
></TT
>nt acl support</VAR
>
is set to <TT
is set to <CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>false</TT
>false</CODE
> then any attempt to set
security permissions will fail with an <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -518,40 +500,32 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1837"
></A
NAME="AEN1740"
>10.6. Interaction with the standard Samba create mask
parameters</H1
parameters</A
></H1
><P
>Note that with Samba 2.0.5 there are four new parameters
to control this interaction. These are :</P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security mask</I
></TT
>security mask</VAR
></P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force security mode</I
></TT
>force security mode</VAR
></P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory security mask</I
></TT
>directory security mask</VAR
></P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory security mode</I
></TT
>force directory security mode</VAR
></P
><P
>Once a user clicks <B
@ -564,21 +538,17 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#SECURITYMASK"
TARGET="_top"
>
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security mask</I
></TT
>security mask</VAR
></A
> parameter. Any bits that
were changed that are not set to '1' in this parameter are left alone
in the file permissions.</P
><P
>Essentially, zero bits in the <TT
>Essentially, zero bits in the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security mask</I
></TT
>security mask</VAR
>
mask may be treated as a set of bits the user is <SPAN
CLASS="emphasis"
@ -594,12 +564,10 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#CREATEMASK"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask
</I
></TT
</VAR
></A
> parameter to provide compatibility with Samba 2.0.4
where this permission change facility was introduced. To allow a user to
@ -610,22 +578,18 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
the bits set in the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCESECURITYMODE"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force security mode</I
></TT
>force security mode</VAR
></A
> parameter. Any bits
that were changed that correspond to bits set to '1' in this parameter
are forced to be set.</P
><P
>Essentially, bits set in the <TT
>Essentially, bits set in the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force security mode
</I
></TT
</VAR
> parameter may be treated as a set of bits that, when
modifying security on a file, the user has always set to be 'on'.</P
><P
@ -633,82 +597,60 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
as the <A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#FORCECREATEMODE"
TARGET="_top"
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force
create mode</I
></TT
create mode</VAR
></A
> parameter to provide compatibility
with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility was introduced.
To allow a user to modify all the user/group/world permissions on a file
with no restrictions set this parameter to 000.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security mask</I
></TT
> and <TT
>security mask</VAR
> and <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force
security mode</I
></TT
security mode</VAR
> parameters are applied to the change
request in that order.</P
><P
>For a directory Samba will perform the same operations as
described above for a file except using the parameter <TT
described above for a file except using the parameter <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
> directory security mask</I
></TT
> instead of <TT
> directory security mask</VAR
> instead of <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security
mask</I
></TT
>, and <TT
mask</VAR
>, and <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory security mode
</I
></TT
> parameter instead of <TT
</VAR
> parameter instead of <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force security mode
</I
></TT
</VAR
>.</P
><P
>The <TT
>The <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory security mask</I
></TT
>directory security mask</VAR
> parameter
by default is set to the same value as the <TT
by default is set to the same value as the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory mask
</I
></TT
> parameter and the <TT
</VAR
> parameter and the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory security
mode</I
></TT
mode</VAR
> parameter by default is set to the same value as
the <TT
the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory mode</I
></TT
>force directory mode</VAR
> parameter to provide
compatibility with Samba 2.0.4 where the permission change facility
was introduced.</P
@ -730,62 +672,46 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
></A
> file in that share specific section :</P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>security mask = 0777</I
></TT
>security mask = 0777</VAR
></P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force security mode = 0</I
></TT
>force security mode = 0</VAR
></P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory security mask = 0777</I
></TT
>directory security mask = 0777</VAR
></P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory security mode = 0</I
></TT
>force directory security mode = 0</VAR
></P
><P
>As described, in Samba 2.0.4 the parameters :</P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>create mask</I
></TT
>create mask</VAR
></P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force create mode</I
></TT
>force create mode</VAR
></P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>directory mask</I
></TT
>directory mask</VAR
></P
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>force directory mode</I
></TT
>force directory mode</VAR
></P
><P
>were used instead of the parameters discussed here.</P
@ -795,10 +721,10 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN1901"
></A
NAME="AEN1804"
>10.7. Interaction with the standard Samba file attribute
mapping</H1
mapping</A
></H1
><P
>Samba maps some of the DOS attribute bits (such as "read
only") into the UNIX permissions of a file. This means there can

60
docs/htmldocs/vfs.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Stackable VFS modules</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -16,8 +16,8 @@ REL="PREVIOUS"
TITLE="Improved browsing in samba"
HREF="improved-browsing.html"><LINK
REL="NEXT"
TITLE="Access Samba source code via CVS"
HREF="cvs-access.html"></HEAD
TITLE="Group mapping HOWTO"
HREF="groupmapping.html"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="CHAPTER"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ WIDTH="10%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="bottom"
><A
HREF="cvs-access.html"
HREF="groupmapping.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2855"
></A
>16.1. Introduction and configuration</H1
NAME="AEN2760"
>16.1. Introduction and configuration</A
></H1
><P
>Since samba 3.0, samba supports stackable VFS(Virtual File System) modules.
Samba passes each request to access the unix file system thru the loaded VFS modules.
@ -121,17 +121,17 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2864"
></A
>16.2. Included modules</H1
NAME="AEN2769"
>16.2. Included modules</A
></H1
><DIV
CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2866"
></A
>16.2.1. audit</H2
NAME="AEN2771"
>16.2.1. audit</A
></H2
><P
>A simple module to audit file access to the syslog
facility. The following operations are logged:
@ -167,9 +167,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2874"
></A
>16.2.2. recycle</H2
NAME="AEN2779"
>16.2.2. recycle</A
></H2
><P
>A recycle-bin like modules. When used any unlink call
will be intercepted and files moved to the recycle
@ -238,9 +238,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2911"
></A
>16.2.3. netatalk</H2
NAME="AEN2816"
>16.2.3. netatalk</A
></H2
><P
>A netatalk module, that will ease co-existence of samba and
netatalk file sharing services.</P
@ -271,9 +271,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2918"
></A
>16.3. VFS modules available elsewhere</H1
NAME="AEN2823"
>16.3. VFS modules available elsewhere</A
></H1
><P
>This section contains a listing of various other VFS modules that
have been posted but don't currently reside in the Samba CVS
@ -287,9 +287,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2922"
></A
>16.3.1. DatabaseFS</H2
NAME="AEN2827"
>16.3.1. DatabaseFS</A
></H2
><P
>URL: <A
HREF="http://www.css.tayloru.edu/~elorimer/databasefs/index.php"
@ -321,9 +321,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2930"
></A
>16.3.2. vscan</H2
NAME="AEN2835"
>16.3.2. vscan</A
></H2
><P
>URL: <A
HREF="http://www.openantivirus.org/"
@ -373,7 +373,7 @@ WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
><A
HREF="cvs-access.html"
HREF="groupmapping.html"
ACCESSKEY="N"
>Next</A
></TD
@ -397,7 +397,7 @@ ACCESSKEY="U"
WIDTH="33%"
ALIGN="right"
VALIGN="top"
>Access Samba source code via CVS</TD
>Group mapping HOWTO</TD
></TR
></TABLE
></DIV

24
docs/htmldocs/vfstest.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>vfstest</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -88,11 +88,9 @@ CLASS="VARIABLELIST"
>-d|--debug=debuglevel</DT
><DD
><P
><TT
><VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>debuglevel</I
></TT
>debuglevel</VAR
> is an integer
from 0 to 10. The default value if this parameter is
not specified is zero.</P
@ -136,9 +134,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
><DD
><P
>File name for log/debug files. The extension
<TT
<CODE
CLASS="CONSTANT"
>'.client'</TT
>'.client'</CODE
> will be appended. The log file is never removed
by the client.
</P
@ -168,14 +166,14 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>load &lt;module.so&gt;</B
>load &#60;module.so&#62;</B
> - Load specified VFS module </P
></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>populate &lt;char&gt; &lt;size&gt;</B
>populate &#60;char&#62; &#60;size&#62;</B
> - Populate a data buffer with the specified data
</P
></LI
@ -183,7 +181,7 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>showdata [&lt;offset&gt; &lt;len&gt;]</B
>showdata [&#60;offset&#62; &#60;len&#62;]</B
> - Show data currently in data buffer
</P
></LI
@ -434,21 +432,21 @@ CLASS="EMPHASIS"
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>conf &lt;smb.conf&gt;</B
>conf &#60;smb.conf&#62;</B
> - Load a different configuration file</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>help [&lt;command&gt;]</B
>help [&#60;command&#62;]</B
> - Get list of commands or info about specified command</P
></LI
><LI
><P
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>debuglevel &lt;level&gt;</B
>debuglevel &#60;level&#62;</B
> - Set debug level</P
></LI
><LI

50
docs/htmldocs/wbinfo.1.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>wbinfo</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -140,11 +140,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>-N name</DT
><DD
><P
>The <TT
>The <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-N</I
></TT
>-N</VAR
> option
queries <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
@ -154,11 +152,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>(8)</SPAN
> to query the WINS
server for the IP address associated with the NetBIOS name
specified by the <TT
specified by the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>name</I
></TT
>name</VAR
> parameter.
</P
></DD
@ -166,11 +162,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
>-I ip</DT
><DD
><P
>The <TT
>The <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-I</I
></TT
>-I</VAR
> option
queries <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
@ -180,11 +174,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>(8)</SPAN
> to send a node status
request to get the NetBIOS name associated with the IP address
specified by the <TT
specified by the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>ip</I
></TT
>ip</VAR
> parameter.
</P
></DD
@ -192,11 +184,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
>-n name</DT
><DD
><P
>The <TT
>The <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-n</I
></TT
>-n</VAR
> option
queries <SPAN
CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
@ -215,30 +205,24 @@ CLASS="CITEREFENTRY"
CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
>smb.conf</SPAN
>(5)</SPAN
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>workgroup
</I
></TT
</VAR
> parameter. </P
></DD
><DT
>-s sid</DT
><DD
><P
>Use <TT
>Use <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-s</I
></TT
>-s</VAR
> to resolve
a SID to a name. This is the inverse of the <TT
a SID to a name. This is the inverse of the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-n
</I
></TT
</VAR
> option above. SIDs must be specified as ASCII strings
in the traditional Microsoft format. For example,
S-1-5-21-1455342024-3071081365-2475485837-500. </P

298
docs/htmldocs/winbind.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>Unified Logons between Windows NT and UNIX using Winbind</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"><LINK
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"><LINK
REL="HOME"
TITLE="SAMBA Project Documentation"
HREF="samba-howto-collection.html"><LINK
@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2360"
></A
>14.1. Abstract</H1
NAME="AEN2263"
>14.1. Abstract</A
></H1
><P
>Integration of UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT through
a unified logon has been considered a "holy grail" in heterogeneous
@ -107,9 +107,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2364"
></A
>14.2. Introduction</H1
NAME="AEN2267"
>14.2. Introduction</A
></H1
><P
>It is well known that UNIX and Microsoft Windows NT have
different models for representing user and group information and
@ -161,9 +161,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2377"
></A
>14.3. What Winbind Provides</H1
NAME="AEN2280"
>14.3. What Winbind Provides</A
></H1
><P
>Winbind unifies UNIX and Windows NT account management by
allowing a UNIX box to become a full member of a NT domain. Once
@ -203,9 +203,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2384"
></A
>14.3.1. Target Uses</H2
NAME="AEN2287"
>14.3.1. Target Uses</A
></H2
><P
>Winbind is targeted at organizations that have an
existing NT based domain infrastructure into which they wish
@ -227,9 +227,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2388"
></A
>14.4. How Winbind Works</H1
NAME="AEN2291"
>14.4. How Winbind Works</A
></H1
><P
>The winbind system is designed around a client/server
architecture. A long running <B
@ -247,9 +247,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2393"
></A
>14.4.1. Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</H2
NAME="AEN2296"
>14.4.1. Microsoft Remote Procedure Calls</A
></H2
><P
>Over the last few years, efforts have been underway
by various Samba Team members to decode various aspects of
@ -273,9 +273,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2397"
></A
>14.4.2. Microsoft Active Directory Services</H2
NAME="AEN2300"
>14.4.2. Microsoft Active Directory Services</A
></H2
><P
> Since late 2001, Samba has gained the ability to
interact with Microsoft Windows 2000 using its 'Native
@ -292,9 +292,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2400"
></A
>14.4.3. Name Service Switch</H2
NAME="AEN2303"
>14.4.3. Name Service Switch</A
></H2
><P
>The Name Service Switch, or NSS, is a feature that is
present in many UNIX operating systems. It allows system
@ -372,9 +372,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2416"
></A
>14.4.4. Pluggable Authentication Modules</H2
NAME="AEN2319"
>14.4.4. Pluggable Authentication Modules</A
></H2
><P
>Pluggable Authentication Modules, also known as PAM,
is a system for abstracting authentication and authorization
@ -421,9 +421,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2424"
></A
>14.4.5. User and Group ID Allocation</H2
NAME="AEN2327"
>14.4.5. User and Group ID Allocation</A
></H2
><P
>When a user or group is created under Windows NT
is it allocated a numerical relative identifier (RID). This is
@ -447,9 +447,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2428"
></A
>14.4.6. Result Caching</H2
NAME="AEN2331"
>14.4.6. Result Caching</A
></H2
><P
>An active system can generate a lot of user and group
name lookups. To reduce the network cost of these lookups winbind
@ -470,9 +470,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2431"
></A
>14.5. Installation and Configuration</H1
NAME="AEN2334"
>14.5. Installation and Configuration</A
></H1
><P
>Many thanks to John Trostel <A
HREF="mailto:jtrostel@snapserver.com"
@ -497,9 +497,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2438"
></A
>14.5.1. Introduction</H2
NAME="AEN2341"
>14.5.1. Introduction</A
></H2
><P
>This HOWTO describes the procedures used to get winbind up and
running on my RedHat 7.1 system. Winbind is capable of providing access
@ -556,9 +556,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2451"
></A
>14.5.2. Requirements</H2
NAME="AEN2354"
>14.5.2. Requirements</A
></H2
><P
>If you have a samba configuration file that you are currently
using... <SPAN
@ -626,9 +626,9 @@ CLASS="SECT2"
><H2
CLASS="SECT2"
><A
NAME="AEN2465"
></A
>14.5.3. Testing Things Out</H2
NAME="AEN2368"
>14.5.3. Testing Things Out</A
></H2
><P
>Before starting, it is probably best to kill off all the SAMBA
related daemons running on your server. Kill off all <B
@ -671,9 +671,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN2476"
></A
>14.5.3.1. Configure and compile SAMBA</H3
NAME="AEN2379"
>14.5.3.1. Configure and compile SAMBA</A
></H3
><P
>The configuration and compilation of SAMBA is pretty straightforward.
The first three steps may not be necessary depending upon
@ -681,44 +681,44 @@ whether or not you have previously built the Samba binaries.</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>autoconf</B
>
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>make clean</B
>
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>rm config.cache</B
>
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>./configure</B
>
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>make</B
>
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>make install</B
@ -737,13 +737,13 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN2495"
></A
NAME="AEN2398"
>14.5.3.2. Configure <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>nsswitch.conf</TT
> and the
winbind libraries</H3
winbind libraries</A
></H3
><P
>The libraries needed to run the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -751,9 +751,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
> daemon
through nsswitch need to be copied to their proper locations, so</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>cp ../samba/source/nsswitch/libnss_winbind.so /lib</B
@ -761,9 +761,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
>I also found it necessary to make the following symbolic link:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ln -s /lib/libnss_winbind.so /lib/libnss_winbind.so.2</B
@ -771,23 +771,23 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
><P
>And, in the case of Sun solaris:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ln -s /usr/lib/libnss_winbind.so /usr/lib/libnss_winbind.so.1</B
>
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ln -s /usr/lib/libnss_winbind.so /usr/lib/nss_winbind.so.1</B
>
<TT
<SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ln -s /usr/lib/libnss_winbind.so /usr/lib/nss_winbind.so.2</B
@ -823,9 +823,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
your system reboots, but it
is faster (and you don't need to reboot) if you do it manually:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>/sbin/ldconfig -v | grep winbind</B
@ -842,9 +842,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN2528"
></A
>14.5.3.3. Configure smb.conf</H3
NAME="AEN2431"
>14.5.3.3. Configure smb.conf</A
></H3
><P
>Several parameters are needed in the smb.conf file to control
the behavior of <B
@ -869,7 +869,7 @@ include the following entries in the [global] section:</P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
>[global]
&lt;...&gt;
&#60;...&#62;
# separate domain and username with '+', like DOMAIN+username
<A
HREF="winbindd.8.html#WINBINDSEPARATOR"
@ -917,44 +917,36 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN2544"
></A
>14.5.3.4. Join the SAMBA server to the PDC domain</H3
NAME="AEN2447"
>14.5.3.4. Join the SAMBA server to the PDC domain</A
></H3
><P
>Enter the following command to make the SAMBA server join the
PDC domain, where <TT
PDC domain, where <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>DOMAIN</I
></TT
>DOMAIN</VAR
> is the name of
your Windows domain and <TT
your Windows domain and <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>Administrator</I
></TT
>Administrator</VAR
> is
a domain user who has administrative privileges in the domain.</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>/usr/local/samba/bin/net join -S PDC -U Administrator</B
></P
><P
>The proper response to the command should be: "Joined the domain
<TT
<VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>DOMAIN</I
></TT
>" where <TT
>DOMAIN</VAR
>" where <VAR
CLASS="REPLACEABLE"
><I
>DOMAIN</I
></TT
>DOMAIN</VAR
>
is your DOMAIN name.</P
></DIV
@ -963,9 +955,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN2555"
></A
>14.5.3.5. Start up the winbindd daemon and test it!</H3
NAME="AEN2458"
>14.5.3.5. Start up the winbindd daemon and test it!</A
></H3
><P
>Eventually, you will want to modify your smb startup script to
automatically invoke the winbindd daemon when the other parts of
@ -973,9 +965,9 @@ SAMBA start, but it is possible to test out just the winbind
portion first. To start up winbind services, enter the following
command as root:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>/usr/local/samba/bin/winbindd</B
@ -984,9 +976,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>I'm always paranoid and like to make sure the daemon
is really running...</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>ps -ae | grep winbindd</B
@ -999,9 +991,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>Now... for the real test, try to get some information about the
users on your PDC</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>/usr/local/samba/bin/wbinfo -u</B
@ -1021,12 +1013,10 @@ CEO+krbtgt
CEO+TsInternetUser</PRE
></P
><P
>Obviously, I have named my domain 'CEO' and my <TT
>Obviously, I have named my domain 'CEO' and my <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind
separator</I
></TT
separator</VAR
> is '+'.</P
><P
>You can do the same sort of thing to get group information from
@ -1034,9 +1024,9 @@ the PDC:</P
><P
><PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>/usr/local/samba/bin/wbinfo -g</B
@ -1056,9 +1046,9 @@ CEO+Group Policy Creator Owners</PRE
lists of both local and PDC users and groups.
Try the following command:</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getent passwd</B
@ -1073,9 +1063,9 @@ directories and default shells.</P
><P
>The same thing can be done for groups with the command</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>getent group</B
@ -1086,17 +1076,17 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN2591"
></A
>14.5.3.6. Fix the init.d startup scripts</H3
NAME="AEN2494"
>14.5.3.6. Fix the init.d startup scripts</A
></H3
><DIV
CLASS="SECT4"
><H4
CLASS="SECT4"
><A
NAME="AEN2593"
></A
>14.5.3.6.1. Linux</H4
NAME="AEN2496"
>14.5.3.6.1. Linux</A
></H4
><P
>The <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -1153,7 +1143,7 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
daemon /usr/local/samba/bin/winbindd
RETVAL3=$?
echo
[ $RETVAL -eq 0 -a $RETVAL2 -eq 0 -a $RETVAL3 -eq 0 ] &amp;&amp; touch /var/lock/subsys/smb || \
[ $RETVAL -eq 0 -a $RETVAL2 -eq 0 -a $RETVAL3 -eq 0 ] &#38;&#38; touch /var/lock/subsys/smb || \
RETVAL=1
return $RETVAL
}</PRE
@ -1179,7 +1169,7 @@ CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
echo -n $"Shutting down $KIND services: "
killproc winbindd
RETVAL3=$?
[ $RETVAL -eq 0 -a $RETVAL2 -eq 0 -a $RETVAL3 -eq 0 ] &amp;&amp; rm -f /var/lock/subsys/smb
[ $RETVAL -eq 0 -a $RETVAL2 -eq 0 -a $RETVAL3 -eq 0 ] &#38;&#38; rm -f /var/lock/subsys/smb
echo ""
return $RETVAL
}</PRE
@ -1190,9 +1180,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
><H4
CLASS="SECT4"
><A
NAME="AEN2610"
></A
>14.5.3.6.2. Solaris</H4
NAME="AEN2513"
>14.5.3.6.2. Solaris</A
></H4
><P
>On solaris, you need to modify the
<TT
@ -1221,7 +1211,7 @@ killproc() { # kill the named process(es)
pid=`/usr/bin/ps -e |
/usr/bin/grep -w $1 |
/usr/bin/sed -e 's/^ *//' -e 's/ .*//'`
[ "$pid" != "" ] &amp;&amp; kill $pid
[ "$pid" != "" ] &#38;&#38; kill $pid
}
# Start/stop processes required for samba server
@ -1261,9 +1251,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
><H4
CLASS="SECT4"
><A
NAME="AEN2617"
></A
>14.5.3.6.3. Restarting</H4
NAME="AEN2520"
>14.5.3.6.3. Restarting</A
></H4
><P
>If you restart the <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
@ -1285,9 +1275,9 @@ CLASS="SECT3"
><H3
CLASS="SECT3"
><A
NAME="AEN2623"
></A
>14.5.3.7. Configure Winbind and PAM</H3
NAME="AEN2526"
>14.5.3.7. Configure Winbind and PAM</A
></H3
><P
>If you have made it this far, you know that winbindd and samba are working
together. If you want to use winbind to provide authentication for other
@ -1305,9 +1295,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
> directory
by invoking the command</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>make nsswitch/pam_winbind.so</B
@ -1331,9 +1321,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
>/usr/lib/security</TT
>.</P
><P
><TT
><SAMP
CLASS="PROMPT"
>root#</TT
>root#</SAMP
> <B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>cp ../samba/source/nsswitch/pam_winbind.so /lib/security</B
@ -1343,9 +1333,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
><H4
CLASS="SECT4"
><A
NAME="AEN2640"
></A
>14.5.3.7.1. Linux/FreeBSD-specific PAM configuration</H4
NAME="AEN2543"
>14.5.3.7.1. Linux/FreeBSD-specific PAM configuration</A
></H4
><P
>The <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
@ -1472,9 +1462,9 @@ CLASS="SECT4"
><H4
CLASS="SECT4"
><A
NAME="AEN2673"
></A
>14.5.3.7.2. Solaris-specific configuration</H4
NAME="AEN2576"
>14.5.3.7.2. Solaris-specific configuration</A
></H4
><P
>The /etc/pam.conf needs to be changed. I changed this file so that my Domain
users can logon both locally as well as telnet.The following are the changes
@ -1559,9 +1549,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2680"
></A
>14.6. Limitations</H1
NAME="AEN2583"
>14.6. Limitations</A
></H1
><P
>Winbind has a number of limitations in its current
released version that we hope to overcome in future
@ -1601,9 +1591,9 @@ CLASS="SECT1"
><H1
CLASS="SECT1"
><A
NAME="AEN2690"
></A
>14.7. Conclusion</H1
NAME="AEN2593"
>14.7. Conclusion</A
></H1
><P
>The winbind system, through the use of the Name Service
Switch, Pluggable Authentication Modules, and appropriate

104
docs/htmldocs/winbindd.8.html
View File

@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
>winbindd</TITLE
><META
NAME="GENERATOR"
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.77+"></HEAD
CONTENT="Modular DocBook HTML Stylesheet Version 1.7"></HEAD
><BODY
CLASS="REFENTRY"
BGCOLOR="#FFFFFF"
@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ NAME="AEN8"
><B
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbindd</B
> [-F] [-S] [-i] [-B] [-d &lt;debug level&gt;] [-s &lt;smb config file&gt;] [-n]</P
> [-F] [-S] [-i] [-B] [-d &#60;debug level&#62;] [-s &#60;smb config file&#62;] [-n]</P
></DIV
><DIV
CLASS="REFSECT1"
@ -84,16 +84,12 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
CLASS="FILENAME"
>pam_winbind</TT
> module in the 2.2.2 release only
supports the <TT
supports the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>auth</I
></TT
> and <TT
>auth</VAR
> and <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>account</I
></TT
>account</VAR
>
module-types. The latter simply
performs a getpwnam() to verify that the system can obtain a uid for the
@ -374,11 +370,9 @@ CLASS="REFENTRYTITLE"
><A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDSEPARATOR"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind separator</I
></TT
>winbind separator</VAR
></A
></P
></LI
@ -387,11 +381,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDUID"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind uid</I
></TT
>winbind uid</VAR
></A
></P
></LI
@ -400,11 +392,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDGID"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind gid</I
></TT
>winbind gid</VAR
></A
></P
></LI
@ -413,11 +403,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDCACHETIME"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind cache time</I
></TT
>winbind cache time</VAR
></A
></P
></LI
@ -426,11 +414,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDENUMUSERS"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind enum users</I
></TT
>winbind enum users</VAR
></A
></P
></LI
@ -439,11 +425,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDENUMGROUPS"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind enum groups</I
></TT
>winbind enum groups</VAR
></A
></P
></LI
@ -452,11 +436,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#TEMPLATEHOMEDIR"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>template homedir</I
></TT
>template homedir</VAR
></A
></P
></LI
@ -465,11 +447,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#TEMPLATESHELL"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>template shell</I
></TT
>template shell</VAR
></A
></P
></LI
@ -478,11 +458,9 @@ CLASS="PARAMETER"
><A
HREF="smb.conf.5.html#WINBINDUSEDEFAULTDOMAIN"
TARGET="_top"
> <TT
> <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>winbind use default domain</I
></TT
>winbind use default domain</VAR
></A
></P
></LI
@ -514,11 +492,9 @@ group: files winbind</PRE
>In <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"
>/etc/pam.d/*</TT
> replace the <TT
> replace the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
> auth</I
></TT
> auth</VAR
> lines with something like this:
<PRE
CLASS="PROGRAMLISTING"
@ -528,17 +504,13 @@ auth sufficient /lib/security/pam_winbind.so
auth required /lib/security/pam_pwdb.so use_first_pass shadow nullok</PRE
></P
><P
>Note in particular the use of the <TT
>Note in particular the use of the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>sufficient
</I
></TT
> keyword and the <TT
</VAR
> keyword and the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>use_first_pass</I
></TT
>use_first_pass</VAR
> keyword. </P
><P
>Now replace the account lines with this: </P
@ -560,11 +532,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
>net join -S PDC -U Administrator</B
></P
><P
>The username after the <TT
>The username after the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>-U</I
></TT
>-U</VAR
> can be any
Domain user that has administrator privileges on the machine.
Substitute the name or IP of your PDC for "PDC".</P
@ -672,9 +642,9 @@ CLASS="COMMAND"
CLASS="COMMAND"
>winbindd</B
>
nsswitch module read an environment variable named <TT
nsswitch module read an environment variable named <VAR
CLASS="ENVAR"
> $WINBINDD_DOMAIN</TT
> $WINBINDD_DOMAIN</VAR
>. If this variable contains a comma separated
list of Windows NT domain names, then winbindd will only resolve users
and groups within those Windows NT domains. </P
@ -802,11 +772,9 @@ CLASS="FILENAME"
><P
>Storage for the Windows NT rid to UNIX user/group
id mapping. The lock directory is specified when Samba is initially
compiled using the <TT
compiled using the <VAR
CLASS="PARAMETER"
><I
>--with-lockdir</I
></TT
>--with-lockdir</VAR
> option.
This directory is by default <TT
CLASS="FILENAME"

2
docs/manpages/findsmb.1
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "FINDSMB" "1" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "FINDSMB" "1" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
findsmb \- list info about machines that respond to SMB name queries on a subnet

2
docs/manpages/lmhosts.5
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "LMHOSTS" "5" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "LMHOSTS" "5" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
lmhosts \- The Samba NetBIOS hosts file

2
docs/manpages/net.8
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "NET" "8" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "NET" "8" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
net \- Tool for administration of Samba and remote CIFS servers.

2
docs/manpages/nmbd.8
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "NMBD" "8" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "NMBD" "8" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
nmbd \- NetBIOS name server to provide NetBIOS over IP naming services to clients

2
docs/manpages/nmblookup.1
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "NMBLOOKUP" "1" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "NMBLOOKUP" "1" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
nmblookup \- NetBIOS over TCP/IP client used to lookup NetBIOS names

2
docs/manpages/pdbedit.8
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "PDBEDIT" "8" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "PDBEDIT" "8" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
pdbedit \- manage the SAM database

2
docs/manpages/rpcclient.1
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "RPCCLIENT" "1" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "RPCCLIENT" "1" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
rpcclient \- tool for executing client side MS-RPC functions

2
docs/manpages/samba.7
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SAMBA" "7" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SAMBA" "7" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
Samba \- A Windows SMB/CIFS fileserver for UNIX

130
docs/manpages/smb.conf.5
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMB.CONF" "5" "18 February 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMB.CONF" "5" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smb.conf \- The configuration file for the Samba suite
@ -739,6 +739,9 @@ each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
\fImachine password timeout\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
\fImangle prefix\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
\fImangled stack\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
@ -874,9 +877,6 @@ each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
\fIprintcap name\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
\fIprinter driver file\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
\fIprivate dir\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
@ -994,9 +994,6 @@ each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
\fIuse mmap\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
\fIuse rhosts\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
\fIuse sendfile\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
@ -1298,9 +1295,6 @@ each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
\fIpostexec\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
\fIpostscript\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
\fIpreexec\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
@ -1325,12 +1319,6 @@ each parameter for details. Note that some are synonyms.
\fIprinter admin\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
\fIprinter driver\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
\fIprinter driver location\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
\fIprinter name\fR
.TP 0.2i
\(bu
@ -1498,6 +1486,10 @@ been executed, \fBsmbd\fR will reparse the \fI smb.conf\fR to determine if the
exists. If the sharename is still invalid, then \fBsmbd
\fR will return an ACCESS_DENIED error to the client.
The "add printer command" program can output a single line of text,
which Samba will set as the port the new printer is connected to.
If this line isn't output, Samba won't reload its printer shares.
See also \fI deleteprinter command\fR, \fIprinting\fR,
\fIshow add
printer wizard\fR
@ -5264,17 +5256,6 @@ Default: \fBnone (no command executed)\fR
Example: \fBpostexec = echo \\"%u disconnected from %S
from %m (%I)\\" >> /tmp/log\fR
.TP
\fB>postscript (S)\fR
This parameter forces a printer to interpret
the print files as PostScript. This is done by adding a %!
to the start of print output.
This is most useful when you have lots of PCs that persist
in putting a control-D at the start of print jobs, which then
confuses your printer.
Default: \fBpostscript = no\fR
.TP
\fB>preexec (S)\fR
This option specifies a command to be run whenever
the service is connected to. It takes the usual substitutions.
@ -5510,87 +5491,6 @@ Default: \fBprinter admin = <empty string>\fR
Example: \fBprinter admin = admin, @staff\fR
.TP
\fB>printer driver (S)\fR
\fBNote :\fRThis is a deprecated
parameter and will be removed in the next major release
following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
the Samba 2.2. Printing
HOWTO for more information
on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
This option allows you to control the string
that clients receive when they ask the server for the printer driver
associated with a printer. If you are using Windows95 or Windows NT
then you can use this to automate the setup of printers on your
system.
You need to set this parameter to the exact string (case
sensitive) that describes the appropriate printer driver for your
system. If you don't know the exact string to use then you should
first try with no \fI printer driver\fR option set and the client will
give you a list of printer drivers. The appropriate strings are
shown in a scroll box after you have chosen the printer manufacturer.
See also \fIprinter
driver file\fR.
Example: \fBprinter driver = HP LaserJet 4L\fR
.TP
\fB>printer driver file (G)\fR
\fBNote :\fRThis is a deprecated
parameter and will be removed in the next major release
following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
the Samba 2.2. Printing
HOWTO for more information
on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
This parameter tells Samba where the printer driver
definition file, used when serving drivers to Windows 95 clients, is
to be found. If this is not set, the default is :
\fISAMBA_INSTALL_DIRECTORY
/lib/printers.def\fR
This file is created from Windows 95 \fImsprint.inf
\fR files found on the Windows 95 client system. For more
details on setting up serving of printer drivers to Windows 95
clients, see the outdated documentation file in the \fIdocs/\fR
directory, \fIPRINTER_DRIVER.txt\fR.
See also \fI printer driver location\fR.
Default: \fBNone (set in compile).\fR
Example: \fBprinter driver file =
/usr/local/samba/printers/drivers.def\fR
.TP
\fB>printer driver location (S)\fR
\fBNote :\fRThis is a deprecated
parameter and will be removed in the next major release
following version 2.2. Please see the instructions in
the Samba 2.2. Printing
HOWTO for more information
on the new method of loading printer drivers onto a Samba server.
This parameter tells clients of a particular printer
share where to find the printer driver files for the automatic
installation of drivers for Windows 95 machines. If Samba is set up
to serve printer drivers to Windows 95 machines, this should be set to
\fB\\\\MACHINE\\PRINTER$\fR
Where MACHINE is the NetBIOS name of your Samba server,
and PRINTER$ is a share you set up for serving printer driver
files. For more details on setting this up see the outdated documentation
file in the \fIdocs/\fR directory, \fI PRINTER_DRIVER.txt\fR.
See also \fI printer driver file\fR.
Default: \fBnone\fR
Example: \fBprinter driver location = \\\\MACHINE\\PRINTER$
\fR
.TP
\fB>printer name (S)\fR
This parameter specifies the name of the printer
to which print jobs spooled through a printable service will be sent.
@ -6725,20 +6625,6 @@ the tdb internal code.
Default: \fBuse mmap = yes\fR
.TP
\fB>use rhosts (G)\fR
If this global parameter is yes, it specifies
that the UNIX user's \fI.rhosts\fR file in their home directory
will be read to find the names of hosts and users who will be allowed
access without specifying a password.
\fBNOTE:\fR The use of \fIuse rhosts
\fR can be a major security hole. This is because you are
trusting the PC to supply the correct username. It is very easy to
get a PC to supply a false username. I recommend that the \fI use rhosts\fR option be only used if you really know what
you are doing.
Default: \fBuse rhosts = no\fR
.TP
\fB>user (S)\fR
Synonym for \fI username\fR.
.TP

2
docs/manpages/smbcacls.1
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBCACLS" "1" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBCACLS" "1" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbcacls \- Set or get ACLs on an NT file or directory names

2
docs/manpages/smbclient.1
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBCLIENT" "1" "18 February 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBCLIENT" "1" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbclient \- ftp-like client to access SMB/CIFS resources on servers

2
docs/manpages/smbcontrol.1
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBCONTROL" "1" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBCONTROL" "1" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbcontrol \- send messages to smbd, nmbd or winbindd processes

2
docs/manpages/smbd.8
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBD" "8" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBD" "8" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbd \- server to provide SMB/CIFS services to clients

2
docs/manpages/smbgroupedit.8
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBGROUPEDIT" "8" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBGROUPEDIT" "8" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbgroupedit \- Query/set/change UNIX - Windows NT group mapping

2
docs/manpages/smbmnt.8
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBMNT" "8" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBMNT" "8" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbmnt \- helper utility for mounting SMB filesystems

2
docs/manpages/smbmount.8
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBMOUNT" "8" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBMOUNT" "8" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbmount \- mount an smbfs filesystem

2
docs/manpages/smbpasswd.5
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBPASSWD" "5" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBPASSWD" "5" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbpasswd \- The Samba encrypted password file

2
docs/manpages/smbpasswd.8
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBPASSWD" "8" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBPASSWD" "8" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbpasswd \- change a user's SMB password

2
docs/manpages/smbsh.1
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBSH" "1" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBSH" "1" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbsh \- Allows access to Windows NT filesystem using UNIX commands

2
docs/manpages/smbspool.8
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBSPOOL" "8" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBSPOOL" "8" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbspool \- send a print file to an SMB printer

2
docs/manpages/smbstatus.1
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBSTATUS" "1" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBSTATUS" "1" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbstatus \- report on current Samba connections

2
docs/manpages/smbtar.1
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBTAR" "1" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBTAR" "1" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbtar \- shell script for backing up SMB/CIFS shares directly to UNIX tape drives

2
docs/manpages/smbumount.8
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SMBUMOUNT" "8" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SMBUMOUNT" "8" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
smbumount \- smbfs umount for normal users

2
docs/manpages/swat.8
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "SWAT" "8" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "SWAT" "8" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
swat \- Samba Web Administration Tool

2
docs/manpages/testparm.1
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "TESTPARM" "1" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "TESTPARM" "1" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
testparm \- check an smb.conf configuration file for internal correctness

2
docs/manpages/testprns.1
View File

@ -3,7 +3,7 @@
.\" <http://shell.ipoline.com/~elmert/comp/docbook2X/>
.\" Please send any bug reports, improvements, comments, patches,
.\" etc. to Steve Cheng <steve@ggi-project.org>.
.TH "TESTPRNS" "1" "28 January 2003" "" ""
.TH "TESTPRNS" "1" "18 March 2003" "" ""
.SH NAME
testprns \- check printer name for validity with smbd

Some files were not shown because too many files have changed in this diff Show More